Autodesk Revit For Beginners Using Revit 2024

1. Introduction Skillshare: This is the very course, isn't really meant it. And therefore, if you have any two great projects, or at school or the workplace, then you also have to consider which support be used. And Robin is one of the most flexible and rewards softwares that you can learn wherever you are an engineer or an architect. Gravity assist software, cognizant bio-metric the same because they use up building information modelling. This one is based around projects use for the planning and design, construction and management of building and infrastructure projects. Wherever there's essentially a 3D CAD software used in many parts of the war by both architects and engineers. So to its quality for grading both simple and complex projects that can be used in constructions. Therefore, this course is focused on knowing and you send these qualities. And one of the most important qualities is the precision of its projects, which makes it perfect for architecture, mechanical and industrial projects. Then my require engineering calculations. This also offers free extensions to connect with other softwares, such as spleen motion, as well as the option to create your own documentation worksheets as you can do it with adequate. Can I still focus on the way they use parametric in rabbit? So the course is same as students who want to carry out architecture of the signs or engineers who went to start being able to carry out the projects without learning multiple subparts to do the same. So you can avoid having to perform some calculations related to the projects are great elements, such as the top surface using other softwares. This course is also a med students who are using the suppliers for the first time, as well as professionals who wants to see if there are differences in the newer versions. Additionally, it allows you to create your sheets within the software so you can present and document the projects creating revenue. The shades uses information of the elements and systems use on your project. Not only degrade the sheets, but also to save time. Because you wouldn't need to assign the same information twice to an element of the project as well. The sheets are very similar to layer, so you can keep working on your project while posts are grading their sheets using different views. Credit for your projects. Just like you can use the vapours in inadequate. This course we will focus on learning how to use that drawing and editing tools are eating up project is and the tools that you have in grabbing as well as family types. Those two gray, the reins, landscapes and environments. Walk through and solar studies, my theorists and grabbing sand sheets to document your project. And then a patients. So all of these, I hope that this course will allow you to start writing your own projects or the science in revenue. 2. Opening a New Project: On this lesson, I wanted to show you how you can create a project, or more specifically, how you can gray I'd revenue model file. Now this can be done in different ways, makers or the interface. So you can create a new project by going to where he says noon on the home. Now once you click where it says New, you're going to have their new project window. And this window you will be able to select the template that you want to use for your project. Now by default, you're going to see that you have a fit templates already available. But also you will be able to search among the templates they already created for rabbit. Now a few of these templates or grading for previous versions of rabbit. So you might be already familiar with them. However, if this is the first thing that you're using, you can simply use one of the templates already on this drop-down. You will be able to sell it if you want to use an imperial template for our metric template. So once you click on Okay, you are going to see that you have a file already opened based on the template there was selected. Now another way in which you can open any file is by actually go into the File tab and then just select and where it says project after hollering, racist. And if I click on where it says project, you will be able to sell like once again, the template of the knee project. But also you will be able to browse any other template now already created for revenue. So once you click on Okay, you are going to be able to see the permanent project that is using the select and template as well. You're able to use the Quick Access Toolbar in order to enable the option of creating a new project from the Quick Access Toolbar. If you enable the new argument, you're going to be able to use it in order to create any file as well. Since these two are command has a shortcut, you're going to be able to use it in order to do the same. So we can use Control plus. And I said Nancy, in order to open a new project. Now with this in mind, your variety, notice that every time you open a new project, you're going to have the name of the project reflect the top of the user interface. But also you're going to see that each new project is going to have a different number. But more specifically, it's going to be a number of the previous one. So by default, rabbit index any projects by using a number I starting by one. Now as well, if you want to switch between projects, you can click on any of these terms. But also you can use Control plus type in the keyword main editor switch between these projects as well. And you're going to see that if we use the Project Browser, you will be able to open different views on the same project, but also on different projects. Which also means the top of the user interface. Useful because it will let you know which project you're working on as well, where you have the tabs for the name of the view. We are also going to say that you have this dropdown in order to select among the different views that you have opened. But it will also allow you the option to close these views. So you will be able to grade and also navigate for other projects that you're working on pretty easily. 3. Saving the Project: If he is forever, in order to grade your projects, you are going to see that Robin will automatically ask you if you want to save the project after certain amount of time. So if you open the Options window, you are going to see where you can actually change the amount of time for the same reminder interval. So you can actually choose the amount of time based on the options they haven't disrupt them. But also so you notice you can even choose to remove the reminders altogether. If you said like races now reminders, however, you're able to save your projects at any point by some different options. One of them is to say to recommend, which you can actually find on the quick access toolbar. So once they use these two argument, you're going to see this window. This window is going to appear the first time that you save your project. So this means that after you save your project, you won't see this window once again. And this window is called Safe past as well. In this window you're going to notice that you have to file extensions. The first one is for the projects, while the second one is using the templates as well. In this window, we're going to be able to select the options of the project when it comes to how it's going to be safe. So you can use the File Save Options window in order to select the maximum amount of backups that you can create for a single project. And every backup is going to be another rabbit file graded automatically. So you won't have control of when the backups are going to be graded by using this window as well. They will have a few options that actually have to do with the abuse and the sheets. So because of this and just going to click on cancel in order to continue showing you how you can save a file, such as e.g. they use the shortcut. So if you use control processes and Sam are going to see that you will have once again, let's save as window. That's like like cyano, since every packet will be sent file and then number of backups will also determine how much is paste the project's going to use on your storage. Now in this case, I'm actually going to save the file. So you can see what happens after I say the file. I'm going to select the name of the file, and then I'm going to click on Save. Now once the file has been saved, you're going to see that probably is going to let you know many, saving the file and the progress on the bottom left as well, you're going to see that there is a cancer right next to the progress bar. So you can cancel this process. Now, this is something that is going to apply to other processes because some of them and actually take a lot of time. Now, once the file has been saved, you're going to see they're not really, actually displays the name of the file that I selected. You're going to see that you can keep saving the project by using the Save to recommend on the quick access toolbar or by just simply using the shortcut. However, if you use the shortcut wherever it doesn't display a message. So the way in which again, notice that the file has been saved, base pay the tax and the status bar, which means that the word reading will appear on the status bar once you save by using the shortcut. And if the file takes certain amount of time to say the progress bar, we're showing the status bar once again. However, if you want to save any file based on an existing one, you can simply use the option Briscoe, say pass. You can go to the File tab in order to use the same path instead of using say, Hey, once the hover where it says Save As you're going to see, but you will be able to sell it. How do you want to save the file? Now in this case, I'm going to click races project. And after this, we're going to say once again, let's save as window. But also you will be able to see the amount of backups. They work great, as well as the day in which it was created. And as well as something for you to notice is the size of the file, which means that the elements that are already loaded on the template are safe where the new files. So you do have to keep in mind how many additional elements you add in your project. Because the size of the file will affect the performance as well. You're also going to see, but you can change the options of the new file as well as the name. So I'm just going to change the name of the file. But I'm going to leave the options as they are. The one before clicking where it says Save. And once I click where it says save here, I'm going to see that never ever actually displays the name of the file that I just created. And as well in revenue, you're able to control the default locations of the different types of files, ligand creating revenue. So if you go to the options, you will be able to see where the files are saved by default. But also you can click Browse inherited change where those files are going to be saved. So you can change the location or you can simply use the default one. So with this in mind, you're able to use the Options window. Not only no need to change what are these say the projects, but also you will be able to use it to see what type of files are being saved. However, in this case, this file hasn't been saved under default location. And this is something that you can notice if I go to the home and then hover the files that I just created. So if I hovered espouse, you are going to see they save it and then modified and the file size, which means that you can see that it hasn't been saved on the default location that appears on the Options window. Now you can actually change to another folder of your choosing. You can reset this by actually change into another folder and then change it back to the default folder. However, same password for you to notice is that the file extension for projects will remain the same. So even though you can great elements for the different disciplines, the file extension will not need to change. Or in another words, you will be able to create everything in one single file. However, in most cases, it will be actually creating a folder just for the project that you're working on. So this means that you will be able to use the Save As window in order to select a folder of your choosing. But also you will be able to create a new folder just for your project. So all these means say, if you need to use any specific folder for your project, again, simply use the Save As window. And once they use the Save As window, you can always verify whether the file has been saved by just simply using the home for my specific files that you have saved. 4. Opening an Existing Project: In revenue once they've already saved the file. Or in another words, your project, you are going to be able to open it in different ways. One of them, a space in the home. So you can go to their home in order to search among the recent files that you already graded. And in order to make sure that you are opening the right phone, you can call the file until you see a separate pan them other flight day. And the size of the file. And as well the recent files is something that you can also open the file tab. However, if you want to search for a file that you cannot see in the recent files, you can simply use the open to argument. You haven't the Quick Access Toolbar. You can use this window in order to search for the phone that you went to open. And once they find Jesus, need to select it before clicking an open. Once the Euclidean open, you're going to see the file that you selected as any fat on the user interface as well. You can use that home in order to do the same. So I'm going to close this file in order to go to the home. I can click where it says open. And then I'm going to use this window once again in order to search and then open the file that I just selected. Now as well as you might have noticed, there is a shortcut that you can use in order to do this. And this one is Control plus source and Oscar. And after using the shortcut, we're going to see once again the open window. So I can open once again the same file or any other file that I want to open. This in mind, you are going to notice how we see it is not only creating new files, but also opening the files. 5. Project Units: Now this lesson, I wanted to show you how you can add in the unit. So the template, now the units, so the template or selected at the moment with a template worst grading. So because of this, you might need to change the units that you're using with the templates. And in order to change the units, you need to go to the freeborn and then click where it says Manage in order to open the manage tab. So you can see where it says Project units. Now once you click resets project units, you will be able to open this window in order to change the units. So in this case, I'm going to close this window in order to show you one of the units that has been used so far. Now what grading the wall, you are going to see wetland off the wall. So after creating this wall, I'm just going to open once again, the project units window in order to change the units are being used on the fillet on the sample value that appears right next to where it says land. In order to change the format of the units by using this window. Now, this window, you are going to notice that you can change the units in the running and the unit symbol. If you change these values, you are going to notice that you will be able to determine not only the units, but also how these values are represented on your project. Now because of this, you're also going to be able to modify how the unit circle x plane by using a few other options. So with this one, you will be able to remove, Let's see what's on the right. Or in another words, the unnecessary serums on the format as well, since they're able to change the value of the rounding, you're also going to be able to use an option that is called customer. And the customer will allow you to change the rounding increments depending on the elements that are grading. Nasa quick center custom will also allow you to see the random increments that is being used for many of the other options. They're using the strap them. So it's a way for you to see the rounding increment that is actually being used on deception. Now what this means set you're going to see and none of the options that you have in the branding of the very useful in your projects as well. Other units only use different type of values. So e.g. the angles use the degrees and science. You're able to change the units amu project by using this window. Not going to be able to change the balance that you need to change depending on your project or in your country or region. Now as well on the project units, you're also going to be able to determine if you want to use an option that is called use the grouping. Now this one is now going to be apparent at first unless the Ukrainian element that actually requires this option. So in another words, the value will have to be higher than what you can see. Most of your projects. However, people to the side that they check meropenem, but you want to use if you enable this option as well. Since revenue is sexually able to create projects that actually use multiple specialties, we are going to notice that you're able to change the units, produce different disciplines, such as electrical, energy and so on. So with this in mind, you can create your projects with a lot more precision. Not only when it comes to the different elements that you can grade, but also with different values that you might need to use for analysis or projects. They use different disciplines. So you can use the Options window in order to determine which discipline when you'll be using for grading a project without a template, but also the units that you want to change for the discipline. Now this becomes very useful if you're creating a template. 6. The ViewCube: When you open up project in revenue, Where do they have greater yourself or somebody else who will need to know how to navigate the project. So in rabbit, you're going to see the navigation that you find on to the abuse is different than on 3D views. And this is speaking, I was under 3D views, you have what is called w cubed. So the BQ, as the name implies, is a queue and allows you to navigate through your project based on controls that you can find out the cube. And you can see these controls when you cover the bQ because the control appears highlighted in color blue. And once you select any of these controls, you are going to notice that the control appears darker than the rest of the BQ. Now suppose Sunday, Friday. Now, how about the BEQ? Is that WQ be social position based on the project. So probate grades and imaginary cube around your project. And that imaginary q is where you're actually selected on the BQ. This case or this project you are going to nowadays. And this highlight is pretty much aligned to the BQ. However, this is actually based on the orientation of the project. So depending on the orientation of your project, and then P or Q is going to change a little bit. So in this case, for this project, you're able to see how this project is oriented in top as well. The main views on the BEQ have a name. So you can see that the name is based on the position of the camera. So you have the top, the front, and the back, left and right basical. But also you have the bottom. And this is because the view cube as a campus that is oriented to the north of your project. And this nor is referred to in revenue as the true north. So they're not up this project, my sexually oriented based on the project. So either to the project was created with this intention or somebody change of the project. Any other way we can use the compass in electric, change the orientation of the project based on the directions on the campus. You can use either nor is cell or West now as false and therefore you do nowadays the ones they use, one of the directions on the campus. The other controls will also change how you can see your project. And if you want to use a different direction, you can always use the home as well. Something important for you to know about the campus. So you can actually use the compass in order to rotate the project based on this directions. But also something that you're going to see is that the BQ always this place, the campus. And I said gouache saying, every time that you change the position of the camera or in another words, how you build your project. They're going to say that a bQ is also going to reflect the change on the position of the camera point, the point of view front, we just see your project. However, on the main views may have on the BQ, you are going to see a few additional controls. If you use any other main views on the BQ, we're going to say this controls. These controls will allow you to change. I'm on the main views on the big cube. So you can use these controls to change front of the front as well. You're going to notice that there are other additional controls in order to rotate the view 90 degrees. So when you're using the main view, so the project, you are going to notice that you will be able to do a few more things. And this is because the maybes and the BQ are pretty much the same as to the abuse, which means they are looking at the project C was painted the so the controls are going to be a slightly different sense. This applies to the main theories of the project. You are going to notice that everything that applies to the top also applies to the bottom. Something else for you to know whether P-Q is that you can also rotate the view by pressing Enter again a BQ. Now this rotation is a little bit different from the campus because with this, you're actually rotating the project based on a B1 and engraving. You also have another way in order to do this, which is by pressing shift from the keyword while pressing and holding left-click on the mouse. So you will be able to rotate the view by their use and the BEQ or by using the keyword. Regardless of the way the U2, you're going to see the big cube is going to change in order to represent a change in the view 7. The Navigation Wheels: As most of the other softwares from out of this, probably also going to use this steering wheels. And a steering wheels I use in order to navigate within any specific view. So because of this, you will have any specific staring. We'll just work through the abuse. Or in another words, particularly navigation. Once the write enable this steering wheel by clicking on this icon, you are going to be able to see what options do you have funded to the wheel is turning first. But as soon tool, which as the name implies, allows you to zoom in and out based on the position of the mouse as well. You have the option that is called pen in order to navigate throughout the EU. And the last option we're going to see today, we'll rewind. And everyone allows you to go back to our previous position of the camera as well. You're going to see that revenue generates a tilt now in order for you to see the previous position of the camera. And now I'm just going to open my 3D view and edit to show you the steering wheels that you have available on 3D views. So after opening the 3D view and just going to use the full navigation wheel, in order to show you most of the options that you have a payload on the other steering wheels. How are you going to see that a few of them are standard, such as e.g. and the one that is called soon and the one that is called pen. You can use this soon. The pen, regardless of whether you're using. However, the orbit is going to be a little bit different. And this is because the orbit actually rotates the position of the camera based on the people and the people who are represented within the view. So as long as the people is within the boundary of the view, you are going to be able to see what are the people that is located, mine as well. You're going to find another standard option, which is the rewind. So you're able to go back to our previous position of the camera at any point by selecting the previous position of the camera. But you want to go back to. And since this is the full navigation wheel, we're going to see even more options, such as the one that is called lot, which is a little bit different than the orbit biggest taste wine and allows you to control when you went to see by using the mouse as well, you're actually able to change the position of the people. So if you use the option that is called center, you are going to notice that rabbit will allow you to change the position of the pivot which is sent in there is going to affect the orbit. So you can change the position of the people in order to change how you use the orbit as well. There is another option that you can now use right away, and this one is called work. So in order to use this option, we've said that 3D view to perspective. So in this case I'm going to go to at home. So again change WT perspective. And after this, I'm going to be able to use the option. The world, as the name implies, allows you to walk through the project based on the position of the camera as well. Reception will allow you to use the keyword in order to adjust the height, but also the Plus key in order to increase the speed. So you are going to be able to use this henry 2 " how you use this option, regardless of the changes that you do to the beer. Remember that you can go back to our previous position of the camera or by using the rewind. And after this, I'm going to change the view from perspective to orthographic. Now. So I'm going to show you the appearance of the other steering wheels that you have in starting first with a mini full navigation wheel, which is nothing more than the full navigation wheel, but with a different appearance, which is a little bit different. So the mini view object waiver because it's going to load more simple than the standard wheels. However, the options remain the same. So you will have some orbit pan and rewind as well. You're going to see the other options that you have on the full navigation wheel. Going to be on the mini-tour building will, which means that you have and then load the up and down as well as the freeway and the work. And as a quick side note, you can also use that shortcut in order to show or hide they will the US signed by the sender user interface. And the shortcut is Shift plus Ws and water. You are going to notice that the full navigation wheel has actually all the options they have on the other wheels, except for one option that you are only going to find on the basic tool building we'll set the basic view is going to be pretty much the same as the mean and View object. We'll, however, the basic tool building wheel, it's going to have the option that is called forward, which is very similar to the Zoom. However, this one is going to use the p. What? This means that you can change the position of the people he needed to change how you use the orbit. But also the assumption. Once again, you can see that the other options will remain the same. Which also means that you can use the Raewyn as well. You're going to see that you have a menu options related to this theory. Well, so by pressing on the second, on this day will, you will be able to change some of the options they have on the steering wheel. But also you will be able to use these mania, may not have to change the wheels available depending on the wheel they are using. Mass. Well, you can use this menu and change a few specific options, such as e.g. the increased works P and a decrease walk speed as well. Something important for you to know is that you can use this menu in order to orient during a specific year of your project. But also, you can reverse the changes by clicking where it says onto your orientation changes. And as well Sunday for you to notice is that there is an option that is called level of hammer. And I love what camera actually allows you to place the camera parallel to the base level, which doesn't mean that you will be able to see the project. So remember that you can zoom in and out in order to be your project. So all of this being said, we can use the different stairwells that you have in rabbit in order to navigate through your project? 8. The Zoom: In revenue, there is more than one way to navigate our B of your project. And one of the ways in which you can do this is by using the Pen. Now you can use the pen by using the steering wheels, but also you can use the pen by using this pores on the user interface. Now these bars are very similar to the bursty. You have random website software like office. However, in revenue, you can also use the mouse in order to do the same. Which means that you can press and hold the mouse and another pen across the beam. And also, depending on how you navigate on your project, you will find a few options in order to change what you can see on the beer. One of them is called previous pursue. Now this one can be found on the drop-down for the song. And this one is actually very similar to the rewind on this theory we'll see are going to be able to go back to our previous position of the camera based on the pen part of a sudden we used before. Now disruptor, you're also going to find the file options to assume, such as for example, assuming region, which is the one that is set by default. So if you use this amine region by using this tool or by using CSS for RSM Romeo, you are going to notice that you will be able to use the mouse in order to select the region that you want to assume too as well, you're going to have another option to assume, which is close to Mao and in parentheses two x. Now, this one also has a shortcut which see us in store for us and Oscar. And this one just decreases. The model are half the size of its growing size. Now as well, you will have an option in order to assume everything that you have within the BU. And this one is called soon to fit. So if you use this tool by using the icon css over FSM, Frank is the shortcut. You are going to see that you can assume everything within the view, as well as funding for you to know is that there is another way for you to use sent to fit. And this one is by actually using that were on the mouse. So if you press it twice, that will under mouse, you will be doing the same thing as using Santa Fe, where that actually is under travel down. Or in another words, without actually isn't a tool, which is something a little bit different too. Another option that is called zoom out to fit, not assume how to fail. It's a little bit different because this one seems to display all visible objects and visual aids. However, both of these options works pretty much the same. When you use this option on abuse or just this one. You're going to notice that over so it's the same as a quick side note the shortcut for this option for tool ACS. And so a is an apple. So unless they use visual aids, you will actually see a different, which is not the case when you use them. Another option that you have in this menu, which is the one that is called Sold sheet size. Now this option actually allows it assume based on the size of the ship, which is something that might be confusing at first because you might not know the actual size of the ship. So what this means is they migrate or shape that is actually bigger than the actual size of the B. So this is very useful when you're depressed than the actual size or the shape as well. You can zoom in and out, but you send away on the mouse, which means that you can zoom in and out based on how you rotate the wheel on the mouse. Now, all of these might be confusing at first because many of these options are very specific. So in most cases we will be using a standard options such as going to fail. So main region or the one that is called previous pan and zoom 9. The Draw Panel: In revenue, even though the elements that you're great on your projects are mostly 3D elements because of the parameters. Remember we use this you're going to find, but you also have a drop panel. And they drop panel or you haven't rubbing asexually use a gray. Many of those elements. And this is because elements such as The Wall need a way for you to place on your project. So because of this, they are going to be either elements or systems. They will also use the draw panel for pretty much the same reason. So you're going to find the drop panel is automatically enabled if you use two domains, such as the wall, but also the motto lines. So you are going to be able to draw on all lines based on the true panel as well. Something for you to know. The moral lines. These lines are called Meroe lines because you can see these lines are the basis of your project. And in contrast to the mono lines, you have other lines. They're using innovations. And this one is cool that data lines. So you can either gray lines that can be seen on all the abuse of your project, or you can create lines, quite specific views which is cited in reminder, be important right away. However, it will become important once you start innovating new project. Now what this means say, you're also going to find that many of the elements use the draw panel in order to create the boundaries that will determine the shape of those elements. One of the elements that is going to be using the draw panel is the floors. So you're going to be able to use the draw panel in order to determine the boundary of the floors, as well as the elements that you can place on your project. So just the roofs and the ceiling. So the draw panel, it's actually very important while working on your project. Now what this means said something important for you to now, essentially you are drawing lines on your project. You might also need to use that the lines When that the lines also be useful on 3D elements. Because a 3D elements are represented a new project place in lines. Now with this being said, I'm going to be using the mono line for this lesson. And this is because the mono lines, because this lines can be seen on the basis of the project. Additionally, another reason why I'm using the mono lines is because for the moral lines, you can see all the tools are commands that you have on the draw panel. Now going to be using the detail lines or another tool that uses a drop panel in order to create the boundary, such as the floors. So I'm going to delete these elements in order to start showing you a tool circumvents that you can use center drop panel. Starting first with a line. Another line will allow you to have, as the other drawing tools, different options on the options bar. So the first option that we're going to find on the options bar is the placement plane. Now the placement plane will allow you to select the level at which we want to place this line, but also will allow you to open the word plane window. Just so we know that we are going to see in a little bit more detail as we continue with the course. Now if we use 1 s, the mono line, we're going to be able to find on the options bar, the option to change. The option to chain will allow you to change one line to the other, meaning that each line is going to be drawn right after the other one. So if you uncheck this option, you're going to notice that after you've finished the next line, automatically, you are going to stop, join the next line, which means that you will need to create another line. So this means that you will need to use the left-click on the mouse once again in order to start a new line. So they chain is actually pretty useful when drawing the lines. Now, the same thing when you're using chain on the Options bar, you will need to use Escape on the keyboard once in order to finish the line or in order to cancel the line, and then use Escape on the keyboard once again, in order to exit the tool or command, which in this case is the motto line. So continuing along when creating the lungs, you're also able to use the upset in order to create an upset based on the position of the mouse. This means that the line is going to be drawn based on the upset that you write on this textbox. Now the opposite is going to be on the opposite direction of the mouse, which means that it's going to go on the positive direction based on the center of the joint area as well, yet able to remove the upset in order to apply a radius. Now the radius will not immediately removed. The effect of the upset on this case very well canceled the option for the upset, which means that you cannot use the upset, what lives and the radius and the radius will allow you to create occur based on two lines that I'm chained together. So the line is very straightforward, but allows you to understand the use of the other drawing tools, such as the rectangle. So the rectangle, as you might have noticed, is pretty much four lines that are chained together. So this means that you will only be drawing the rectangle by using two clicks on the left mouse, which means one click to start the rectangle and one-click to end there. So this means that you can apply Escape on the keyboard in order to cancel the Coin Join. And then using Escape on the keyboard in order to cancel the mother lines to argument. And as part of the Options bar, you will be able to notice that is pretty much the same thing as you get with the lines. So that means that you get the placement blame. However, they are going to see that on the options bar, they chain option, he said by default. And you can uncheck the chain option because otherwise you won't be grading our rectangle Now as well, you can create the rectangle when an officer might type in a value on the textbox that is right next to where it says upset. Which also means that you can also type in a radius right next to waste this radius when creating a rectangle. Now, the next tool that we have is the inscribed polygon. Now at the inscribed polygon, asexually a polygon there is greater by multiple lines. They are drawing together based on the radius of the circle, or more specifically, on the interior of the radius of a circle. If you go to the Options bar, you will be able to find a few different options that you didn't have before. Howard, the placement plane will remain there. So if withdraw any scraped polygon, you will be able to see the result based on the assumptions part. So by changing the next option on the options bar, which is the sides, you're going to be able to see that you will draw these polygon with n number of sites or segments that you type on the options bar. But at the same time, you will notice that even though this is based on the circle, you are not going to get us a reference, the center, or any circle when drawing the polygon. And this is because this polygon is not one single continuous line. So this means that if we change the offset for example, and then we draw the following polygon, we are going to notice ready segment is calculated by Rabbit independently, which is made apparent by this automatic measurements that we get after placing lay inscribed polygon. And as well as the rectangle, you also get the option to add a radius. I'm drawing this polygon. However, in this case, when you use the radius, when you're actually telling rabbit is the actual radius of this circle that is used in order to create the polygon. Which means that you will not be able to select manually the radius of the circle that you use in order to draw the polygon. Or in another words, you will not be able to use the mouse in order to select the final radius of the Parliament as well. You're going to see that the chain option on the options bar is set by default. Now the same thing can be said for the next row into, which is the same scribe polygon. Now the same prescribe polygon is pretty much the same thing. However, you will be drawing the polygon outside of the radius of the circle. Our pretty much everything else is the same. So you get a placement plane. You have the chain option already selected by default. And signs on the options bar. We already changed the default value for the sides and six to 12. We can go ahead and change it once again to six. The same time. You always can change the offset for this polygon, which means that you can also change the radius that you are going to be using in order to determine the radius of the circle that is going to be used in order to draw the polygon. As a great reminder, remember that this polygon is not one single continuous line. However, the next rain to actually create segments that look like a circle, has one single continuous line, which is the circle. This circle is very simple because you're able to create a circle by center radius so you can select my use and the mouse. And on the Options bar, you have pretty much all the options that you have with the polymers. So this means that you will be able to select the Placement Level. Chain option is already selected by default. And as well, you're able to add an upset by you send a text box right next to where it says upset. But also you're able to lock the radius by using the option for radius right next to be upset. Now even though the circle is a very simple drawing tool, there are other tools you can use. They're pretty much based on the circle, such as, for example, the estar en radius. So the radius will allow you to draw a radius by select the entry points, or in another words, might use and then left-click on the mouth three times. Mason, the options that you have on the options bar, such as the Placement Level, the option to chain, which is selected by default. And in this case, you can actually uncheck the option to change. Nice. You'll notice this star n radius needs for you to select the beginning and the end, but also needs for you to select the radius by using the mouse. So by using the Options bar, you can also change or the Permian upset for the star n radius. Which also means that you can lock the radius by using the option for radius right next to the upset, which has with the other drawing tools will disable the option for the upset when logging the radius may send the pain and the textbox. And as a quick side note, when it comes to the circles wherever it will also try to keep the yargs cohesin one way or the other? Now the drawing tools that are based on the circle are very similar. However, the center ends are asexual a little bit different because it creates an arc that can be used to join X6 ten lines. Because this one, even though it's pretty much the same one as the star, n radius, asexually different when it comes to how you select the radius. So in this case, and the same placement plane as the other joint tools, I'm just going to select first the center of the radius. And then I'm going to select the two points that are going to complete the radius, which means that you keep select entry balance, but the order in which you select them is actually different. Now the same time, this one doesn't allow you to change. They start to another line because of the fact that you said like the circle first. And because we can use as a reference two lines there already created, as you saw in the video. Now as with the other drawing tools, you can change the upset when drawing this arc. And at the same time, you can lock the radius of the arc by selecting our radius on the Options bar. Motivate, you can cancel. I do recommend Mason Escape on the keyboard. However, depending on the tool or demand that you are using, you will need to use Escape on the keyboard multiple times in order to cancel when you are doing that too, or Command or Control Panel. So you're going to notice that you can even cancel that to elementary school math online. Now, the next tool or command is actually integrate independently. So in this case I'm going to create first a couple of lines so I can actually use the tangent and arc. Now this heart will allow you to create a curve that connects the end of lines that already exists. So what I'm going to do is actually connected two lines there over the place. However, you can connect these lines when they are actually on the same place, my plane. So I'm going to keep the same placement plane. And as you notice on the Options bar, you also have the option to chain and unchanged, which will make it easier for you to connect the lines. And as well, you can lock the radius, radius and the radius option. Non-cyclic signer using the radius actually removes the continuity of the circles. Or in another words, bakery SNR based on the circle. So you are going to be able to use this in order to grade half a circle. So depending on what you want to do, you might want to lock, unlock the radius. And also there is another way in which you can connect cleanser over the crater. So if I actually create, once again the following lines, I can go ahead and use a different letter R, which will allow you to create an art based on two lines that are connected, one with the other. So I going to keep the same placement plane on the options bar. And then I just need to select each of the lines that I want to use, integrate the field of art. Now the Philip part doesn't allow you to have the option for chain. However, you can lock the radius may use and the value for the radius on the Options bar. Now the next drawing tool is actually a little bit more complex because it will actually have options that are not available with other drawing tools and this one is displaying. Now this plane will allow you to create a line that is divided on multiple lines. However, they are considered one single line. But on top of that, it actually has modifiers or controls that can be used in order to edit this plane even after it has been created. So I'm going to be using the same placement plane. And as you can see, you can check or uncheck the option on the options bar. So we can change these planes together. And in order to finish this plane You will need to click Enter on the keyboard, or you need to use double-click on the mouse in order to finish this plane. Once you're finished as plane, you can select this plane in order to see this controls. Now these controls will allow you to modify this plane depending on how you want to use these controls. But also these controls actually modify this plane so much that you can actually add or remove these controls. So when selecting this plane, you can click on Add control. So you can actually add controls on this plane is still selected in order to modify this plane even more. Men as well, you can select this plane in order to delete controls to make this line a little bit simpler. So you're going to be able to add or remove controls in order to adjust their brains. Have this flying by center controls. The recreating. Our Center for you to notice is that if you remove that controls on this plane, where it's not going to allow you to completely change this plane. And this is because the minimum amount of controls they will have on this plane. Well, we treat this plane will always have a control where you can use in order to address this plane. So this plane is very personal, but also pretty useful because as you're going to see, you can use this plane in rabbit. In editor gray are the elements that otherwise would be hard for you to gray or you want to be able to create the marrow. Now as well in the drawing tools, you have an alternative to the circle, which is called the ellipse. Now the Ellipse tool or command, will allow you to create a drawing by using two radiuses. So after clicking the Ellipse tool or a command, and then by just simply using 1 s level one is the placement plane you're going to see by using the mouse unable to select the center of the ellipse. And then I'm just going to select the first radius, which will allow me to create a basic drawing. There will be modified by the second radius. And after finishing their lives who are going to see a few automatic dimensions. But also, we are going to see there are a few controls on both sides of the ellipse. I can quickly create another ellipse by using the same process in order to show you how these controls can be used in order to modify the ellipse. So after selecting the first ellipse, try creative, you are going to see how these controls can modify the ellipse by modifying both of the radiuses independently, M as well while grading this ellipsis, we're also going to see that on the Options bar, you have the agentic chain, however, is grayed out and as a quick sign-up and as well. Now the same time, you also have an alternative to the arc, which is the partial lips. So the process is pretty much the same. However, the partial ellipse will only grade half of the ellipse. So after clicking the partial ellipse tool, and I'm just going to make sure that I'm using 1 s level one has the placement level in order to create the partial lips, Let's say why they are graded and leaves. Which means that I need to select one basic radius and then I will create another radius which will modify the shape of the ellipse and wealth gradient this ellipse, we're also going to see they are able to select and select the option to change one ellipse with the other by using the option to change on the Options bar. Now the last frame tool is not actually a terrain tool or my selection tool, which also allows you to create a line based on your selection, which means that it needs some existing elements in order to be used. So if I create the following wall and then I use the model lines are going to be able to use the option for PICC lines. Picc lines will allow you to create a line based on an existing element or I referenced within the element. Now in this case I'm just keeping the same placement plane. However, on the Options bar, you also have the option to change the upset. With this. You are going to be able to greater line based on a reference and an upset the same time. If you're noticing the upset, you are able to use some of the options for the option to lock, which will automatically grade a line that is locked to the element that you use as a reference. So if we select the element and then drag the element, you are going to notice that the light also moves based on the element. However, if you are at the extension of the wall, the line will not change because even though it's locked to the wall, belt line is also locked in the sense that it cannot be edited. So you're not really at it on the line, just the wall, even though you're moving the line based on the movement of the wall 10. The Snaps: You might have noticed by this point, something's changed the appearance of the cursor. And this is because rarely snaps are references that you can use in order to create elements for your project. And among these snaps, you're going to have mentors section as well as the end point. However, you're going to see. But you also have the horizontal as well as the particle. So probably makes even going to be able to let you know when an element is drawn horizontally or vertically as well. You're going to see that revenue also snaps the elements that you're drawing based on an angle. And this will depend on a value. But he said For the snap, this means you are going to be able to add in the value that is used to determine what are these elements are going to snap. Know what this means. So you can change how they snaps are going to behave by essentially a snaps window. So you can go to the Manage tab and then click where it says snaps. And once they click where it says snaps, we're going to have their snaps window. Now the snap swinger you are going to notice may have several sections and options that you can use. But more importantly, they're going to notice that the values that you have on this naps window reflect the values that you are using the units. So this means that if you use the project in its window pane order to change the units that you use, the length and the angles. You're going to see that the values and the snaps window are going to change based on the changes from the units. Which is something very important for you to keep in mind because it has a minimum value they can use regardless of the units. So in this case, I'm going to change the units back to default before grading anything within this project as well. In this window, you're going to have another section, just water-based and apps they use on the objects. Hormone specifically the snaps that you can see, my grading or placing elements and your project. But also you're going to see we are able to enable or disable this snaps individually or by using Check none or check. Oh, so with this, you will be able to select only this time so you want to use while working on your projects. But also this is a quick way for you to see what each of these snaps actually does, as well as a quick sign or you're going to notice that vertical and horizontal harden are available among the objects snaps. Now you can enable or disable. Now what this means say, you are going to see where you can actually use all the snaps at the same time without being so confusing. However, in some cases, you won't actually need all these nerves pet rabbit users. So you can choose to enable or disable FeO. This snaps depending on the project that you're working on. Additionally, you can see all the other malignant mentioned related to the elements they are placing on your project. So you can see the relationship between those elements while placing the elements, but also after placing the elements. Which also means that you can sell any of these elements in order to see how that really one with the other myosin, there are many dimensions, but also you can disable all the snaps. You send the snaps window. So you can check the option that is called Snap hops. Or you can use the shortcut which assesses and Sam was an Oscar. However, something for you to see is that if you disable the snaps, you won't be able to see if the elements they are creating are placed on the model, our place, horizontal or perpendicular. So total snaps will be mostly useful when you are creating an object within your project without using a sub reference, an existing one. Additionally, you're going to see right next to the name of the snaps, you will have the circuit of the snap as well, the shortcut. I love you to use that a specific object snap as well. So therefore you didn't notice is that you have a section for the objects snaps because there are other snaps that you can use for creating your project, such as, for example, snap to remote objects, which is the one that allows you to create elements Bayesian as a reference or the elements as long as they're close to each other, but with the other elements between them. So once you selected the reference that you want to use, a hidden line will appear, letting you know that reference that is being used. But also there are many dimensions, will let you know the measures between the reference and the element that you're grading. So as you can see, the aromatic dimensions will be pretty useful when you send the snaps. So with this in mind, you're going to see that you will be able to enable for the sake of this snap, depend on your project. However, there are other snaps right now going to be covering in this lesson, which are the point clouds and the coordination models As well. When you send the snips window, you're going to see where you have all the objects snaps that don't have a check. Such as for example, the close recycled through snaps and the force horizontal and vertical. Now this has snaps are actually used for specific purposes. So what this means is that you will be using this project snaps as a way to save a little bit of time on grading for placing elements in your project. So if I grade these elements on this file, you are going to see that I can use the shortcut for close in a rubber gloves the shape, porosity, you're going to see that the shortcut posts will appear on the status bar. In this case, once they use the shortcut, you will need to use the space around the keyword. And then you will be able to use the left-click on the mouse in order to be able to use this tool once again, which also means that you can use Escape on the keyboard in order to cancel these two. So they send mine. You're going to notice that it also tries to help you by using the status bar. Now as well. This will also apply to all the other objects snaps, such as for example, for horizontal and vertical. So what lives in these two recommend against simply use the keyword in order to lock this element horizontally or perfectly. Now when it comes to this snaps, something very important for you to know it's there. You also have the temporary overwrites. Now the temporary overwrites are used in order to select the sugar that you really want to use. So this means that you will be able to change this name the prevalence is using for the one that you need to use. Now there are few different ways in which you can do this. One of them is by using the right-click on the mouse while using certain tools recommends. So when using a two argument, such as this one, you're going to be able to find the Snap overrides on this menu. And if you hover the snap override, you are going to notice we're going to have the app snaps, as well as the option to turn off the snaps and the overwrites. So with this in mind, you can disable the overwrites as well as the snaps at any point. We're going to see in gravity it snaps are very important. However, they snaps that you will be using will depend on the way they want to use rabbit, but also on your project. Because the larger the project, the more snaps you're going to see replace a new elements. In some cases, you will need to make sure that you are using holiday snaps require in order to create a detail of a shape instead of the entire project. So in some cases, you will need to use a specific snap because this allows you to override the snap there is currently active. So you can use this snaps. So just to close the intersections, the end points that make points and so on. Nasa quick center, some of these snaps are going to be easier to understand based on this menu part of a circuit. Such as, for example, snap made between the points. And this is because this is now allows you to draw a temporary line that is used in order to determine that midpoint between two points. So you can use this one. We know that the grade an element where it's between two other elements. So as you can notice, you can easily use the objects snaps in different ways. However, you can simply use the snap overrides in cases in which they snaps are very close together. Or in another words, it will be able to use this menu in order to filter harmonious names they have available. However, this is something that you can also do based on the shortcuts as well as type on the keyboard. Because type in the keyword allows it to cycle between these snaps when you send that to recommend such as this one. So you will have different ways in order to do the same thing. And this is snaps still depend on the values that you have on this next window. Additionally, something for you to know is that you can actually change these values. However, you need to make sure that you're keeping the same format that you can find on this window. Or in another words, now these values are using the same format that you have on the project units, as well as the format met ECU's in order to separate the values on this window. If you don't want to worry about this, you can simply add the specific values they want to change. And as well this has names. We'll apply one grading any element for your project. Which means that if you want to overwrite the snap points again, you will need to use this menu are the shortcuts. And as I mentioned before, some of these snaps are not going to be current this lesson. So I'm not going to be able to show you at this point the Snap to Point Clouds. However, you can see that this has snaps are also going to appear on this menu. So you're going to use this snaps in many different ways. Now in most cases, you won't be using these snaps over rates. And this is because it's actually very intuitive. So in most cases, you won't need to change the default settings that you have on these snaps. And as well as in the for you to know it's there, you can actually use this snaps on 3D views. Doesn't matter if you're grading elements on it to the baby by three dB. And in some cases, using a 3D view might be a little bit easier. However Sunday, you can notice is that the automatic dimensions will become even more important when 3D views, because that is not an actual representation of the axis they are using when creating elements on actually being used as supported lucky SketchUp, this might be a little bit confusing because of the way that the project is represented on 3D views. However, remember, lessons the snaps will apply to 3D views. You can use some of these snaps to make this a little bit easier. And also something that you will notice migrating your projects is that the objects naps can also be used when you send the tools or commands, but you'll find on the modify panel. So you can add the element by using the controls and the objects snaps, as well as the tools that you have on the modify panel. So all these means, these names will be very useful when creating and presenting new projects in Revit 11. Controls and Shape Handles: When you select the elements may already placed on your project, you are going to see that depending on the element that you select it, you might have controls that you can use NOW at a b element. So in case of elements such as the walls, you're going to have controls, have both ends of the walls. But also you will have other controls that only going to be baseball or another views of the project. And this one circle shape handles some other controls. They have the appearance and are going to be considered standard controls as well. Some elements will have a different way in order for you to control the element. So in the case of, for example, the walls, they're going to notice that if you use type in the keyword on one of the I just said the wall, that age will eventually be highlighted. Once the DH is highlighted, you are going to be able to track DH to another position, which is another way in which you can control these elements. Now what this means, say, you are going to find that many of these controls are available in other elements of your project. So the shape handles are also going to appear on these boxes. Has a quick sign-up, this box or circle esco box. So when you select this box, as you're going to see that this is the name that appears on the type selector having the proper place. Now the shape handles in this case will allow you to add the park's by using all the six faces of the box as well. They're going to be a few other controls. There are specific to some of the elements that you can place on your project. So you're going to have, for example, the flea control. Now the flea control is a control that allows you to flip that direction for an element. So you can use this in order to flip the direction of the wall. Nasa quick sino, You can do the same thing, but he's in his basement, the keyword, while the wall is still selected as well, the doors are also going to have by default flip controls. If you place a door on the wall, you're going to notice that you actually have to one of them in order to flip that or towards the inside, towards the outside. While the other one has going to flip the direction in which the door is going to open. However, once again, you will need to keep in mind that these controls are going to be visible depending on what you're using. So some controls are going to be based on floor plans, while another one's on elevations and maybe on 3D views depending on the element that was selected. However, this see the inflammation of the family system and control that you're using. You can simply hold the control. And once the utilities are going to be able to see not only the control they're covering, but also the family system and the family 12. Introduction to Family Systems and Family Types: Migrating your projects and rabbit for the first time send it might be confusing is why they have the properties. Window, we change the properties. And this is bigger syndrome. Maybe you have family systems and family types. So the family system is the one that robot users to query the family types. So the family types are the children of the family system. So in the case of a family system, such as the walls, you are going to see, you're going to have different family types. But another family types, I still consider walls. So you can choose which family tightly when I use. But also you can add other properties for their family type. Now you can perceive this a little bit better by using a type of place window. Because if you open the diaper place window, you will be able to see their family system that is being used for the family type, which in this case is basic wall. And now the family ties that graded based on this family system. So with this, we're going to be able to notice that each of these family types are still using the same family type. Sound. This drop-down, you can say that all the family payoffs are created by using the family system that is called Basic wall as well. This family system is already created by additives. So there are family systems, they're already available after installing revenue. So the question becomes, why you're not able to use the type. I will explain that in order to change the properties for the elements that you sell like that. And this is because the properties that you have here are actually used for the instance. Or in another words, all the individual elements, they're using the same family type. So this means that you are going to have properties that will allow you to change individual values and properties that will allow you to change all the elements that are using the same family type. So in the case of the walls, here are going to be able to change, for example, the height of the wall. However, my going to be able to use the type properties window in order to be a structure of that wall, along with the other words that are used in the same family pipe. And as well, the instance properties can also be used when placing an element by their use in the Options bar are these properties. So what this means is that every time they need to change an individual element before or after placing the element, it will be using the options bar or you will be using these properties. You can edit an element or multiple elements may already placed on your project. Many of the valleys appears as multiple values. Or in another words, when gravity lets you know whether values are defined on the elements selected. However, if you want to change the properties of their family time, you will need to use the type properties window. So another way in which you can look at it is that you use the type properties window in order to change properties on all the instances that I use in the same family type. You use this other properties or in another words, the instance properties in order to edit the properties that you need to change based on the placement or used that the element is going to have. So with this in mind, you are going to notice that the instance properties are equally as important as the type properties. However, since the type properties window or specific to a family time. And then rub, it will also offer you the option to duplicate our family pipe, which goes hand in hand with the option of running. So if you wanted to create a new family type based on an existing one, just need to click where it says duplicate in order to create a duplicate of the existing family. And once they do this, we're going to see that the element that you selected is using their new family type. So they changed it to you to do that family time will not affect the one they use. The operator, which also means that the instance properties will also remain independent from the family type. So the properties that you want to use, well the pen, what you want to do on your project. Now this might seem very confusing at first until you start grading your project. Especially because Robby has a few tools that you can use in order to select multiple walls. They're using the font family types. And even though they are using different family types, you are going to notice that the instance properties will affect all the elements as long as they're using the same family system. So what this means is that an instance is still at children of the family type. And therefore they are also children of the family system. Which is something that you can notice if you use other family systems. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to place a component this project. But more specifically, I'm going to place this component based on where I placed the walls. Or in another words, based on how it tried to represent the family types and the instances. Nice. A quick side note, when you are placing a component, you are going to be able to see very many dimensions. It's going to provide you information that you might mean one place in the element. And this is going to include the snaps and the references are being used. I'm placing an element on your project. So once the replace this component, I'm just going to use that type selector in order for you to see how you can easily change each of these families from one family type to another. So in another words, you can have different family types. There is in the same family system. However, you will still have instance properties. So regardless of the family tie that these elements are using, instance property will affect these elements individually as long as they're using the same family system. Now, a quick side note, if you have any tau, however, the family system or family type that is being used on an element, you can hover the element until you can see a text box that will show the family system in family tie that is being used and the element. However, if we select one of these elements and you open the diaper very swaying that you are going to notice that the change is by using the type properties window are going to affect all the elements that are using the same family type. So depending on what you want to do, you will be using either the type properties window or the instance properties. How are something else you're going to notice throughout this course? Instead, revenue classifies the family systems based on categories. So the family systems that you can find will depend on the category. So for example, this family systems fall under the category of furniture. And this is the reason why you can choose between these two family systems. Family systems that allows you to create the world's falls under the category of words. However, you will need to keep in mind that the instance properties and the type properties window will modify the elements depending on the family systems theory was used in order to create the sediments. Which is the reason why you can't use the type properties window in order to even change the family system. So the only place in which you will be able to change the family system instead type over this window. Now we call this means say the family types can be a little bit confusing. However, the most important thing about the family types is that they allow you to create different types of elements for families without having to create a whole new system. Or in another words, they find was whether having to figure out how they are going to function already provides you with a family systems. So you can focus on use and there's family systems in order to create your project 13. Standard Selection: So now continue with the basics. I'm going to start showing you how you can select elements while working on your project. Now the basic way to select an element is to use the left-click on the mouse. And in order to unselect it, you just need to click on an empty space as well. You can select the element and use the modified to recommend in order to unselect it. Which is the same thing that you can do by selecting the element and then use an escape on the keyboard. Now if you have several elements that are nested together or they are very close together, you can use tab on the keyboard in order to cycle through the elements that are selected. And this is something that you can do in both directions, meaning that you can cycle through elements by using tab on the keyboard. But also you can reverse the order of the selection by using shape at the same time they are using the keyword, meaning that you can use Shift plus Tab on the keyword in order to do the same thing, but under reverse order. Now as well, Sunday for you to keep in mind is that if you hover an element, you are going to get a textbox. But the basic information of the family or family system they are selecting before even selecting the element. And at the same time, you can select multiple elements by using contour on the keyboard. And this also can be mixed with the use of the Tab key on the keyboard in order for you to add an element to your current selection that is nested or is very close to each other. Now in order to select an element within the same selection, just need to use control plus shift on the keyboard in order to change the icon from plus to minus. Now you can use the left-click on the mouse in order to select multiple elements at the same time. Now, this selection box will select different elements depending on the direction in which you are creating the selection box. So if you go from left to right, you are going to be able to select all the elements that the selection box actually touches. While if you go from right to left, you will be selecting only the elements that are within the selection box. Now bank continue with the selections. They are going to be able to notice that you're able to use tap on the keyword in order to select elements that are connected together. And the best example for this is a chain of walls. So if for example, I select the following chain of walls and then I try to delete it. You're going to notice where all the worlds that were connected together are going to be deleted. So this is actually pretty useful under selection of elements such as the walls and other elements or systems such as the lines. Now continuing on, you're able to repeat a selection within Revit at any point by just simply using the right-click on the mouse after a particular selection and then click here where it says select Previous. Now this is the same thing that you can do by just simply holding Control plus the left arrow on the keyboard. So this is another way to make the selections a little bit simpler. 14. Select All Instances: And drop it. There is an option that you can use Analytics select all the elements that are using the same family Pi. And this one is called cell-like of instances. However, this assumption will allow you to select the elements are using the same family time within a BU part within your entire project. So in order to use select all instances, you will need to sell in a family tie by selecting the element within your project before using the right-click on the mouse. And once they use the right-click on a mouse, you just need to call it where it says select all instances. And once they do this, you're going to be able to see that you can select for instances basic will imbue the entire project. So if we select basically imbue, you are going to see that all the elements that are used in the same category will be selected, but only within the same view. Additionally, something for you to keep in mind is that this option only applies if the elements are basically, if you have all the elements that are not basically within the BU, they won't be selected. Which is actually not the case. We select instances in entire project. And this is because this allows you to select all the elements that are using this same family time and the entire project regardless of the beam. So you are going to be able to use this with any of the family types. But also they are going to be able to see that you can do this in any of the abuse of the project, which is going to be mainly as well when the leading elements or when changing the family type that you're using. Now as well, you're going to see that there is an option that allows you to select all the elements and the entire project, including light chains. Now they stop training is going to be pretty much the same thing as using an entire project. However, this one is going to include an diligence. They are graded for your project. So this means that this is going to include family medicine, included on a legend such as this one, which means that this is going to be mainly used when selecting annotations. So as you can see, select all the elements within your project. They're using the same family pay asexually bracing 15. The Selection Bax: On this lesson, I want to show you a tool that you can use when you want to isolate your selection from the rest of the project. And this tool is cool. Let's section box. And this tool can be found on the modify panel. However, these two are the man is grayed out until you select the elements that you want to isolate your project. So once you selected the elements, you are going to say that is to paste now enabled now as well. You can also use this tool isn't a shortcut, which is P as in boy, excess and x-ray. Once you use this tool, you are going to see that the elements that were selected were isolated from the rest of the project. But also you're going to notice that the rest of the project has pink from the selection. So this section box is actually a box now you can use in order to crop your project. So once they use this tool, you are going to see later on the properties you have enabled this section box. If you want to see, whenever I start a project, you just need to disable this section box. Hey, certainly important for you to know. However, this section box is that a section box is this table and also hitting away by default. So you can show that section box if you want to use by clicking on the second. Additionally, you can see that the scope box has shaped handles on all the phases of the scope box. This means that you will be able to change they stand up the box by just simply using the shape handles. So once that is section box has been enabled, you will be able to use it in a little while you can see within the view. So as you notice, this section box is not actually the same thing as isolating the elements within your project. However, it serves the same function. You can use the section box in order to isolate the elements from the rest of your project. But also you're going to use this section box in order to present your project in a different way. Or in another words, in red, the gray has specific use for your project. Now it's a big sign on this section box is also going to change the extent of what you can see within the BU point. In other words, it's going to change how the project display if you use the home as well as the zoo. So all of these means say you are going to be able to use this section box. Not only as a way in order to isolate elements within your project. I don't see another kind of specifically representation of some areas are elements in your project 16. The Undo and the Redo: Migrating your projects, use and review it, see where you're going to use a standard options like in any other software. And one of these options is the Undo. So if you want to enter, suddenly you have done in your projects. You can use this tool by going through the Quick Access Toolbar or by using Control plus the essential as well. Since you can undo the changes, you can also be due to changes. And you can do this. You send it to the risk of Redo right next to the Undo. And as well, you can use this tool. The shortcut. The shortcut is Control plus Y is in yellow. This tools, you are going to be able to Undo one change at a time, but also Redo single change at any point. Now as well, you can undo multiple changes. Viii sentenced to hormone specifically, why isn't disruptive, which is also available for the Redo. So you can use this trap them in order to handle multiple changes are in auditory to multiple changes. As I mentioned before, you can use the shortcuts, an attitude of the same, able to do this anyway, the one, however, something where you can notice as the tools, you actually have two shortcuts. This is because you can use this standard shortcut or you can use the shortcut very sustained by activists. So this means that instead of using control C, you can use R plus the backspace. Or in the case of the Redo, you can use Control. While essentially if plus the essential for all this means that you can simply Undo changes the editing your project, but also it will be able to redo the changes at any point in play Change, this is still available point in other words, you can use this Options as long as you then do additional changes. Because the Redo will not be able to redo any of the changes because there will be erased in favor of the new changes. 17. The Modify Panel part 1: When working in web it, you will need to create elements and systems that you will need to use in order to finish a project. But at the same time, you will need to know how to modify these elements and systems. So in order to do this, Revit provides you the modifying tools which you have on the Modify tab, which is actually the same mother faint that you have once you select an element. However, the Modify tab will change a little bit based on the element they are selecting. So in this case, I'm going to show you how to use the Modify tab with the modifying tools with our first selecting an element. By using the Modify tab, I'm going to hover on the first tool or commands that I'm going to show you, which is the most to recommend with this circuit, MSN Mary B, as in Victor. Now everything forward, one of these tools or commands that you'd have in the Modify tab, you're going to have a tooltip. And in some cases we are going to have a video also going to show you that tooltip that you have an amount of faint that, but as well, I'm going to show you how to select around select an element. So after clicking on the move tool or command, you're going to notice an icon that represents them up to or commands. And once you select an element by using the left leg on the mouse, you're going to see that the element that you select this now highlighted, but also if you use the right-click on the mouse, you're going to have a menu which will allow you to finish the Selection, which is the same thing as using Enter or Space on the keyboard, but also the option for cancer, which is the equivalent of using escape on the keyboard. After you finished the Selection, we're going to be able to move the element based on the position of the mouse, which is something that you can see in real time. But the values that are displayed by Revit when moving the element. But also after using once again, we'll left-click on the mouse in order to select where you're going to be built in the Grids. Now the Automatic measurements will allow you to verify that new position of the Grids. Now if we use once again, the Move tool or command, you're also going to notice they have Options and the Options bar now determine how we're going to be using this tool or commands. Now the first option that you have on the Options bar is the option to constraint, which will allow you to constrain the movement of the grid based on the axis layer haven't the drawing area, meaning the x-axis, but also the y-axis, which is pretty much the same thing that you can do by essentially from the keyboard. Now by unselect and the option to constrain, you're also going to be able to use the option that is called disjoint. Now the option to disjoin will allow you to move an element regardless if they are joined together. This option will pretty much allows you to move an element anywhere you want without any restriction. Now as well, remember the your able to use the Snaps as references when moving an element, which means that you're going to use limit points than Nero's and also any anticipated. It's under joint area. And on the Options bar, you are going to see her the option for multiple is actually grayed out. Now the next door or command is actually very similar to the Move tool, and this one is called Copy. Now the big tools or commands as the shortcut of CSM Charlie, or as an Oscar. Now as the name implies, these two Pergamon actually allows you to copy the element based on the way that you use the mouse. So after selecting the copy to recommend, I'm going to be able to see the icon that represents the copy to recommend. But also I'm going to be able to select an element that I wanted to copy. So after click and I'm finished Selection, you are going to see the, you can use the capital assay, use the Move tool. In this case, we are going to be grading a copy the element that you selected based on the position of the element. Once you use the left-click on the mouse in order to validate the new position. And as with the move tool, you actually have options on the Options bar. How are in this case, you are going to notice that you have the option for constraint, but you're not able to use the option of disjoint because his great end. If you use the constraint option, you're just going to constrain the movement of the element, which in this case is the group based on the axis. They haven't the joint area. Now as well. Something for you to notice is that you can also use any are the tools or commands that you have in the Modify tab after selecting the element. Now in this case, you are going to be able to use the option for multiple in order to create multiple copies of the same element. When you do this, you're going to be able to select multiple preferences or locations for any of these elements, which is something that you can cancel by canceling the tools or commands. Now, next we're going to have a tool or commands that allows you to rotate an element. Now, this one is called rotate with the shortcut is and Romeo for us and Oscar. Now the rotate tool or commands will also need for you to select an element. How are selecting the element only allows you to have the element that you are going to rotate. Because as the move tool or commands, you will need to select a value in order to determine how much you want to rotate the element. Now in this case, if you rotate the grid, it will be using the mouse or my specifically the left-click on the mouse in order to select the value of the rotation base. By default, understanding of the element they are rotating. Now the rotate tool or commands actually has more options than other modifying tools on the Options bar, such as the option for disjoint. And also we're going to have an option while using the birthday to Pergamon that is going to allow you to copy the element, which is going to allow you to have the element they are rotating plus the element the West graded by using the rotate to recommend. The same time, you're able to rotate an element based on a balloon type on the textbox right next to waste this angle Now if you type in this value and then you click Enter, you're going to see that the Grids rotates based on that value. Now the same time, you're able to change the reference that you're going to be using in order to rotate an element by clicking where it says place right next to racist center of rotation. Now with this in mind, you're going to be able to use the Snaps in order to select the center of rotation we want to use in order to rotate the element. The same time. If you change this location, you are able to set up 1 s by default, just by clicking away says default. Now for the next tool or commands, I'm going to create an additional one in order to use the to look Amanda is called drain extend to coordinate with the shortcut DSM, tomato, ours, and Romeo. So by using these tools or commands, I'm going to be able to extend this to Walls. And then they made one with the other by just simply using MATLAB click on the mouse in order to select the Walls to which you want to apply this to augment. After selecting the three mics time to coordinate, to argument, and just going to select the tools that I want to extend. Now the next two or command works with the same principle. However, in this case, we are going to trim or extend a single element. So by using the trim, extend single element to recommend, you are going to be able to either trim or extend an element, like in this case, I'm going to be able to trim the wall by using a cell reference, decorate the radius creating. So as you notice, we will need to select a reference that is going to be used in order to train or extend the one that you are going to select based on the left click on the mouse. Now the next two or command is pretty much the same tool or commands that I use before. How in this case, we are able to trim an extent multiple elements. So by using the trim extend multiple elements, you are going to be able to do the same thing that you did before. However, in this case, you're going to be able to trim or extend multiple elements based on a single reference by your select them one at a time for my using my selection window that goes from right to left. Now you waste using my left click on the mouse. Now the next two or command is very similar to the extent single element in the sense that you require a reference before moving the element, but also in the sense that the element's going to move where it's going to change based on that reference. So if you use the align to recommend by either clicking on the aligned tools or commands, or by using this shortcut as an apple and less and Larry, you're going to be able to select a reference such as degree, in order to align the element that you select by using the mouse to the reference that you decided to use. That's why when you use the align tool, you're able to constrain the element by using the padlock icon. Now if you use the icon, you're going to notice that the reference, which in this case is the grid, is the one that is going to determine where the wall is going to go. So by using control C or by clicking on the Padlet in order to remove the constraint, you're going to notice that you are able to select a single reference in order to align the find part so the Wall, so just the poor, they were the one which will also allow you to use the icon in order to constrain the external, the Wall based on the reference. As far as funding for you to notice is the one using this tool argument. You're also going to be able to see the Modify tab. There's for this to, for demand. And then this term, you are going to be able to find a few options that you can use a specific for this to augment. And one of them, esco, multiple alignment. With the multiple alignment, you will be able to align multiple elements to a single reference. Now as well. Another option will allow you to log me elements to the reference to your using. This means that if you click where it says log, you will be able to log all the elements to the reference at the moment. You use these to our standing there going to see throughout this course is that the elements that are use as reference can not be locked to another element. So the Grids can be used as a reference, but I can appeal to another reference. Nowadays is they are able to design and we want to use the align to recommend on elements such as the Walls. So when you send this drop down, you're going to say by saying portions that you have on the wall alignment, which means they are going to be able to use the align to argument by also taking into account that will alignment as well. Something important for you to know about the airline to recommend is then now you're going to be able to use the align tool Pergamon in order to align the patterns they assign to elements such as the ceilings. So with the airline to recommend, you're going to be able to align the pattern to have reference of your choosing. However, the pattern as such, it's not actually going to change. So when you're actually aligning, is the reference there is being used in order to define the pattern is going to restore. So because of this, we're going to be able to use interface or select a face. Now sleep-wake signer, the patterns are the same thing as a hatch, inadequate. So all of this being said, you're going to see the first tools or commands are very similar to each other and they're very easy to learn once you start working in New Project 18. The Modify Panel part 2: Now next, you have the upset to argument with the shortcut was an Oscar FSM Frank. Now the upset to or command allows you to create an upset by using a cell reference element. So by default, the offset tool or command will create a copy of the element the or upsetting. However, as you might have noticed in January, stay upset based on the position of the mouse. And also based on the value that you haven't, the textbox right next to where it says upset. Because by default be upset. He said as numerical. However, if you change this to graphical, you're going to be able to opsin an element based on the moment the mouse. So this is actually very similar to use the copy to recommend. Now as well, if you don't want to create a copy, you can uncheck races copy on the Options bar in order to move the element Mason and upset, you will be able to use this assumption in order to Moby element within the project without actually having to use them up to recommend. This means that the reference that you are going to be using in order to move the element is going to be the original element. And as you notice, this is actually pretty useful in elements such as the Walls because you will be able to modify your project without having to create additional elements. And also because you won't have to use another element as a reference in order to copy the element. Now if you use Thi upset with systems such as the Walls, you're going to notice that by using the offset tool or commands, we're going to be grading and upset, right? Biotech and when it says copy, the Walls are going to extend or trim based on many position of the wall. By continuing with the modifying tools, we're also going to have a to recommend. Little allows you to mirror elements based on reference, which is the medial axis. To recommend, this one will allow you to me run element that you select by using a reference with the shortcut MSM, MSM married. So after selecting the group, I'm going to be able to click recess finished Selection in order to use the other group as a reference. And by before you're going to notice that rabbit Grids and other group, which is set copy of the original one. So if I select the new grip and then I use once again the mirror big access to recommend. I'm going to be able to uncheck on the Options bar, the option for copy. And once I use the following reference, we're going to notice that the axis has been moved to a new position. And this is something that you can use multiple times by using the same reference or any other reference. Now there is another mirror to our command, marius call mirrored Draw axis with the shortcut VSM David, MSN married. Now the mirror axis will allow you to do the same thing as before. However, in this case, we are going to be drawing the axis that you want to use this reference. And that's when the other mirror able to uncheck the option for copy, which will allow you to move degree based on the reference that you draw by. You send me what Draw axis. So if I select once again the first group, you are going to notice that the result is pretty much the same. With this in mind, we're going to be able to draw your own reference. So this is yet another way in which you can move an element on the model space by using a cell reference another element on the model space. Now in Revit, you're going to be able to split an element or I System by just simply using the split element to recommend or by using the shortcut SSN, Sam, Ls, and Larry with the split element to recommend, we are going to be able to split a wall based on your selection. So by using the left-click on the mouse, I'm going to create the following selections within the wolves there I just created. As a quick sign them. Once you split an element such as the wall, you're going to be able to heal the element by using the point controls As well. You have an option on the Options bar that allows you to delete the inner segment there is greater, might use some of these elements to our command. So if I grade the following Selection, you're going to see that the inner segment has been the leader. And if I undo this, you are going to notice that each of these segments as an independent wall. Now there is another option in order to split elements, which is called split with gap. Now displayed with gap to recommend allows you to do the same thing. However, you're only going to be splitting the element that you are going to be grading a gap between these elements. Now this is based on a default value that you haven't. The Options bar. If I use once again the spleen with gap to recommend and then change the value by using the Options bar. You're going to see that the gap has changed based on the value that I type in on the Options bar met also, if you use the point controls, you're not going to heal the wall because there is a gap people in the Walls as well. Yeah. Able to use this controls. He noted the level, the option for joint fungi and the Walls that also if you click on this padlock icon, you will be able to unconstrained the gap, which will allow you to Change the gap, but also it will allow you to heal the wounds, has to do with the split element to or Command and the case of the Walls. Now within review, when you select an element able to use up to recommend, there is called been like ligand up into or commands or by using the shortcut VSM Peter N as in Nancy. Now the beam will allow you to pin the element, meaning that you will not be able to rotate the element, the element, and so on. That also, you will be able to obtain the element by using the on paying to our command or by using the shortcut us an umbrella, BSN Peter. Now this will allow you to completely remove the pain. However, if you add the pin one more time, we're going to notice that is not the same thing. Having the pain and click and underpinned by just simply using the campaign to recommend. Because one has the option for you to paint the element once again, while the other one removes the paint altogether. Now since we're able to create elements of any point, you are also able to delete them, meaning that you're able to delete elements by click in another lead to or commands, or by just simply use the shortcut DSM, the IP network. Now the delete two or command allows you to select an element in order to delete it. However, the Selection is not only limited to the element we are selecting or buy wine, you are selecting the delete to augment, meaning that you can select the element first before you use the Delete to or commands. But also you will be able to select multiple elements in order for you to delete them all at once. Which is pretty similar with the word you can do by using the keyboard in order to delete the elements. Now the last two or commands that you're going to find out the Modify tab is the scale. So you can use this scale to recommend right-clicking on the icon or by using the shortcut arson Romeo as a network. Now the scale to recommend allows you to a scale an element you are selecting, placing the same process they use in order to draw a line. So you will be selecting the starting point on this scale, and then you will be select and the second point in order to scale the selection. Now based on the elements that you're selecting, the scale, we change the way in which scale is applied to the element that you selected. In the case of the wall, it just extend the wall. But in the case of a rectangle graded by multiple Walls, it will have in the same thing as with the lines. And as a quick sign-up, if you look into the textbox right next, waste is a scale. They're going to see in the current scale of the elements that you select it. This value represents the value that is multiplied by one. In order to find linear scale. If I use the scale two or commands, once again, you're going to notice that on the Options bar, able to scale these elements based on the graphical option. But on Sunday America. So after choosing numerical, we're going to notice Modify used to as the value for the scale. The effect of the scale on the elements that are selected is going to be based on the numerical value. But you haven't the textbox mannose on the reference studies use in order to scale the element. The scale tool or commands is actually pretty intuitive with this Snaps to use my select and the references. So the scale tool or command uses the Snaps. So you can select the references that you want to use in order to scale the element or multiple elements at the same time, like in this case 19. Click and Drag: Once you start editing your projects in Revit, you are going to see that there is a way for you to move the elements that are already placing your project without using. Then move to determine if you select any of the elements that are already placed on your project. You're going to see that their appearance or the mouse or curse on the screen, it's going to Change in editing a leaky know that now you can move the element on the project. So we're going to be able to press and hold my mouse in order to present Drag the element that you selected. Now the same time, if you are telling this with only one element, you're also going to get the Automatic Dimensions, which also means that if you do this with more than one element at the same time, you won't be able to see the Automatic Dimensions. Now suppose on there for you to notice is the moving these elements is also going to take into account if the element is connected to other elements. Which means there is going to take into account the other elements that is connected to. So if you select one element or multiple elements, they are now connected to another element. You're going to be able to move them anywhere within the model. Wasn't important for you to know, is that you can parse and Drag the elements on the model after you have selected them. But also you can present Drag a single element with a select and the element first. And this is because there is an option on the Status Bar that allows you to present Drag elements without having select on them first. So if you go to the storage part, there will be able to disable the option, the risk or Drag elements on Selection. And once they have done this, we're going to see, but you're still going to be able to select the element that you want to drag. But you won't be able to track the element without selecting the element first. Or in another words, you won't be able to press and drag the elements on the model. Which is going to be very useful in cases in which you want to make sure they are select the LI element instead of pressing and dragging. Or in another words, you can avoid moving an element when you're selecting an element minutes close to other elements. So depending on how you want to work in your project, you're going to be using this option or not. However, in most cases, you are now going to notice that the assumption is unable because part of the most part, you won't have to worry about pressing and dragging the element. Instead of selecting the element 20. The Automatic Dimensions: Editing the elements may have placing your projects you are going to see, but you will have temporary elements and information related to the element that is selected. Now these elements are considered Automatic Dimensions. And this dimensions will work very similar, but the dimensions that you can create in your projects. However, suddenly for you to notice is that these elements not only display the information related to the element that allow you to edit the element. So this means that if you sell like this blue numbers, you are going to be able to add the element that is selected based on any value. While at the same time you are growing, they see. This also applies to the position of the elements relative to another one. You are going to be able to change how the reference element is being used. Relatively elementary selected placing these ventricles. But also it will be able to change this value. Pain edited change the position of the elements selected relative to the reference. Now the references such as another element on the project. However, you're going to notice that this reference, me, select that depending on how the element has been placed. So in case of an element that is now connected to another element is going a bit different to an element Paris actually connected to another one. So you're going to notice how much information you're going to go, but also how many references and relationships you're going through have within the element selector. Now the elements within the same Project, Marlow, the same time you're going to say that this information is going to include even radiuses. Somebody isn't mine. They're going to have a lot of control and information for every element by having your projects share, going to be able to either the elements that you already placed on your project based on information that is given to you by data mining dimensions. But also they're going to be able to use the Automatic Dimensions in order to whether the element. So you will be able to Change weight tensors, land and event radiuses that are related to the element that is selected. And this is also very useful because when you're grading an element, wherever it is going to show you all this information at the same thing, we chose some means, but you will be able to create an element by also using this information, as well as the blue numbers. Or in another words, the police are use in Arabic ray, the element, and the case of the radius, you are going to be able to see in which direction use as the radius point. In other words, if it is counterclockwise, quite fit is clockwise as well. The Automatic Dimensions can be used when you send tools or commands such as them will do, which means that you can use it. But tools that allows you to place elements on your projects, as well as tools use for editing. So all of these might not seem varies. But first, however, since you don't have a lot of tools and commands that you can use in order the gray and added the elements they placing your project, you are going to be able to say, learning many cases, yes. And the Automatic Dimensions in sexually quicker than using some other tools or commands, they haven't Revit. Especially because the controls of the elements that you place in Revit allows you to use the Automatic Dimensions in order to make changes. However, again, notice that you can control these changes placing constraints. So this means that you can use constraints in revenue, may not have to change the relationship between the elements that you're creating your project. Which also means you can apply this in other elements that you can create bias and review, such as, for example, the families. Now as well. So the important for you to know is that Dimensions can also be used in order to see the values of the element while you're placing the element. But also when you're editing the element regardless of the constraints that you might be using on your projects. So they're going to be very practical in many of the Projects that you can create when you send revenue is going to be very useful because you can make a lot of changes on your projects 21. Using the existing Views of the Projects: And rabbit, suddenly you will be used Sinaloa out of the abuse. Not only because he used abuse in order to work in your projects, but also because they abuse are use in order to grade the Sheets, Alloway the data blocks. So you need to know not only how to work with a Sheets and also how you that'd be used to the Sheets. So in this lesson I'm going to focus on how you use the abuse. I starting first, how you know which view is being used on the Sheets. And this is because in some cases, you might be using a project that was created by somebody else. You're going to notice that if you select the baby, it will be able to see the name of The View. But also if you go to the Project Browser, you will also be able to find the abuse as well. You're going to see that abuse have a square on the left nerve. This square is in colorway. That'd be, it's not actually being used in the shape. So that way you will be able to know if the BU has been assigned to one of the Sheets. Now with this and mind, you are going to notice that the Views are also organized based on the type of beer. So these people that I just hoping will be under the category that Revit has assigned to it. Now not all the Views have a category that I cannot be changed. So there will be over Views. They can actually have a different category. One of these examples are the floodplains because the floor plans are actually part of the plant Views. So this means that if you go to a different category on the Project Browser, you will be able to find the Views under that category. Somebody is in the Project Browser. I'm going to show you their bills under a different category. And under this category, I'm going to be able to open this view. Now there may be used, they use in order to create your projects are planned Views and elaborations, sections and 3D Views. And within those categories, it will be able to find some subcategories that rabbit will allow you to use. So these might be confusing at first until you get use to the different plant Views that Revit you can grade, but also the different types of elevations, sections, and 3D views that can be graded. So one other benefits of use and review instead, Revit will actually organize the Views via proper category From the moment that you create it. Now what this means say, you are going to notice that you can select the elements that you have your projects on any of the Views that allow you to visualize your projects. This means there will be able to select an element within this period. Or you won't be able to select an element or never, or image as well. Since we are able to open multiple views at the same time, you are going to see your able to select elements within the Views. And then you will be able to add in those settlements on other Views. So this means that the element will remain selected in any of the Views. So there'll be Use the European will actually allow you to patient lies and Revit project had the same time. Now as well. They treated me that is opened by default. It's the one that's simply appears as 3D. So this is the standard 3D be the You open at the moment, you open a project. And also it will be able to open the 3D view, not only by you send the Project Browser. So you can use the Quick Access Toolbar in order to open the default 3D view. Now with this being said, by default 3D view, it's actually pretty useful because we will also allow you to select the elements within your project. But also it will allow you to see which element are you selecting another Views. So you are going to be able to use the 3D view in order to visualize, but also in order to select elements like on the other abuse as well. Since the same elements will appear on different views, you can select them but also verify that is the element that you want to select by hovering the element until you save a text that shows the Family System and Family Types of the element. So you can always look at the base information of any element from any view, regardless if it is selected or not. However, the 3D view is a little bit different because you will have access to the ViewCube. And the ViewCube, what you might not allow you to swimming through your Selection. Somebody assembly, sorption, you're going to be able to say a little bit better, the element that I selected by using another beer. So as you notice, the Views are pretty useful when working in any of your projects as well. You're going to find my sum of abuse, make a gradient review can also be changed to a different category. So this means that any of the plant Views and actually be changed. So if I select this plant beer, you're going to see that I able to use the Properties for more specific like that type selector in order to change the blend View to a different category. So you are going to notice that if I change the plan view to a different category, my plan B is going to appear under that category, which is something that you can also notice that you send the type selector. And this is sending that you can reverse by just simply using once again, the type selector, which also means that you can use Control-C. So I'm just going to select the view before changing the type of plant View and wants that I have done that you are going to see, and now that'd be a Sunday different category. Additionally, I'm going to undo the changes by using once again, let type selector. Now PSICQUIC signer, you can use Control plus tap on the keyword in order to cycle through the Views. So you don't have to use the user interface if you don't want to as well, you're going to find somebody elements cannot be visualized properly if you're using an option that is called the lines. And this is Picker as thin lines changes the values of all the lines in your projects to attain line. So because of this, you're not going to be able to visualize the proper thickness of the lines that make the elements, whether it's on a wall, on the annotations. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see many, some cases you actually need the patient lies all the elements they are going to appear once that you bring your projects, wanting some other cases, you will actually need to make sure that you're able to see everything on your projects. So you can actually add to their parents or their lines within the Sheets. And this is important for you to know because even though you're creating a project, you century the elements, you are going to notice that these elements are represented by use and lines. So the representation of the elements is actually based on lines 22. Using the Status Bar to Change the Views: When creating your projects and review a few things that you will need to know about different changes. They're going to be useful one person New Project to others. And one of them is the scale. Now the scale is going to depend on the template that you're using. So this means that the scale of your projects is going to be based on the template that you selected once the open any Project. And then this person by default, you have two templates. One of them users imperial units, while the other one uses metric units. So once you open up project with any of these templates, are going to be able to change the scale based on the SI units by sending many of you open after selecting this tool on the Status Bar. However, since you're able to Change the project Units, you are going to see, but there isn't a specific unit that will allow you to change the scale, and this one is the length. So if you change the units that you are use in underlain to a unit that can be used in another country or region. You're going to see that these skills are going to change based on the units that you select it. So that the units through and selecting are actually the units that you use, a metric as well as emperor. So this means is that if you use something like meter, it will be actually changing the metric. While if we use three and fractional inches, it will be actually use an impure. This in mind, you will be able to determine which is Kelsey when I use in your project, depending on your country or region. Now suppose something for you to notice is that the annotations, so you projects are going to change based on the scale that you're using. And this is because the size of the model is the one that actually changed in the beer. So because it is, you're not going to say change the position of the annotations and the rest of the elements within the beer. And a lot this is because the families they are use in this annotations are integrated within the project. So because they won't actually be able to change their size when you change the size of the model, which is something that you can notice because there are other elements that are actually change. It's a representation based on their scale, your projects. So when you change the scale you're project we're going to see and nothing's really going to change except for the size of the families using this annotations. Non-cyclic Sina, where it's going to use and a specific scale every time you create any view. However, some other B is the great for your projects are going to depend on the scale of The View that you use an electric write any abuse and one example, these sections. So once we get to this section is you're going to nowadays, but if you create a section on a floor plan, this section is going to have my same scale of the floor plan. Now with all this means, you can change the scale at any point without having to worry about that you're using. How are in some of your projects you might actually mean and a specific scale. So if you choose Custom on this menu, you are going to notice that you will have this window, the customers gave window. You are going to be able to change the scale they are use in on the view. However, you're going to notice that the scale will need to have a random value. Which means that in the case of a matrix system, you won't be able to use decimals. So what isn't mine? It will be able to change the scale, scale of your choosing, that Panel New Project. Now the drop-down, you won't be able to see the scale, the graded. However, you can still change the name of the scale where you want to use. So in case you want to change the name that is going to be display, you need to change it by You said this window. And then just need to check racist display name before select in the name. However, the scale, it's now going to show in the drop-down. So this means the costume allows you to create a constant scale for each of abuse. Or in another words, if you want it to this by using the option that is called Kusto, will actually need a gray scale for the Views in which you want to use the custom scale. Hey, most cases, you are now going to need hackers, some scale. So you won't have that many cases in which you will need to grade and a specific scale for any of your projects. Especially because creating a custom scale also implies that you might need to create annotations for the subscales. Because as you remember, the size of the model is the one that would actually change by changing the scale point. In other words, annotations by default are not graded for different scales. Now we owe this means. You are also going to notice you can actually change the scale 3D Views. And this is because at 3D views also display the annotations. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to see that you will be able to modify how the annotations are going to be representing your projects, but also the scale do you want to use in order to create the Sheets? Now with this in mind, you're also going to notice that you can also change the detail level. Now the detail I will sexually use in order to change how much you want to see within the abuse. However, there are only three detail levels available for all the abuse. If you wanted to improve performance, you won't be using medium or fine because of how the mind and they might be one large projects. And even though they improve the amount of details on the beer, in some cases, you don't want to see all the layers of the Wall. So their options can help you decide that detailed level of a specific elements. Now this all depends on how the elements are actually change based on the detail levels. So this means that the different levels we can create, whatever you can play, Centreville can be displayed differently depending on the detailed level that you're using. However, there is a few elements in which you will need to change. Whether you want to see that Panel, the detailed level that you're using. One example, this is the families. The families is one of the elements that you can place New Project that actually allows you to Adam, what do you want to see on each of the data levels as well? Thanks, you're able to Change the detailed level. You're also able to Change the BU by changing the visual style. Hello. In another words, it will be able to use this menu to select among the different styles that you can use to change the representation in your projects. Now there are some visual styles that will actually affect your selection, such as, for example, the wireframe. And this is because the wireframe allows you to see all the elements are the same time, even if they are behind each other. Now by default, you're going to notice that you actually use hidden lines. So you will need to change the wireframe or to another visual style such as trade it if you want to see a difference on the beer. Now the official styles are very similar to each other. Searches shaded and consistent colors. However, there are going to be a few differences that will require for you to know a little bit more about the materials. And what this means. Say, you can actually see the textures on the materials if you use the option that is called texture. And last panel is you're going to see that there is an option that is called realistic. The one that is probabilistic will try to assemble how you will build the model. If this was a render, our inequality is now going to be in the same level as a render as well. Something for you to notice is that you can actually do the same changes on all the abuse of your Project. So you will be able to cycle around the different visual styles regardless of the video. Using this, you will be able to change how you present your project. Myosin Revit how this means, say, you're able to change the representation of the Views in different ways. However, this is still something very basic because there will be all the options. I will complement the changes you can do by sentence tools or Options 23. Understanding the Boundaries of The View: If while creating your projects, you're not able to see certain elements is most likely because they are sigh of what is called like crop region. Now the templates to work rating for this portion of Revit, you are going to notice that there is a cobalt boxes and you open a 3D view. And also very few select those boxes. Those boxes will have Shape Handles that you can use in order to the extent of the box. Now this box is sexually use in order to determine why do you can see how the different Views having your projects. However, you're going to notice that you're not able to edit this box on all the abuse or your projects as well. You're also going to notice that all the be use of your project I going to be affected by these bugs. So because it is able to use a 3D view in order to this side when you want to see the different views. So your project, without having to make changes to all, be used independently. So depending on the be that you're using, you will be able to Change the box. For, you, will see the elements that you normally wouldn't be able to see. However, something as well for you to notice is the sum of the Views will allow you to see all the elements regardless of this box. And this is because Views such as this section's actually have different properties. So what this means is that if you go to the Properties while using this section view without selecting any element with a New Project, they're going to notice that there is a property that is called for clipping. Now the far clipping actually allows you to determine if you want to see all the elements regardless of the distance. Or if we want to see all the elements based on whether box is covering. This section is by default, they're actually use the bugs are sub reference when determining what you can see on this section. And this means that they functioned like previous templates. Or in another words, like the templates, the work rate it for other versions of Revit. So this one's actually use Options like far clipping and far clipping upset. However, in order to keep it simple, I won't go into much step on how the assumptions are use to the Sheets. If you wanted to make sure that you're able to see all the elements regardless of the box, you will always need to make sure that the far clipping appears as an eclipse. However, in some other views, that won't matter because at the box, now this is something that might be confusing at first. And this is because on this template, the property that is called Berkeley upset, it's actually being overwrite by the box. Now the box and I'm been talking about, it's actually called esco box. Now this code box is something that you don't actually cover one learning Revit For the first time. However, since this template is already using the scope box, you will need to know whether he lays out editing this box changes. Why do you can see on the abuse? But also what you have two boxes. So something that we're going to notice about the scope boxes is the one of them will actually determine the elements that you can see on all the Views. While the other one will allow you to determine the annotations that you want to display on the basis of your projects. So both of them I go into be a slightly different. However, both of them were access boundary of where you can see under different views of your project. Additionally, the smaller box allows you to use it's controls in other views besides the 3D view. And this is because this one is the one that determines how you display annotations such as terrorists and the levels. And this is something that you can notice once you select this code box or when you look at the properties of the floodplain. These boxes will actually change where you can see on the Blend Views, elevations, sections. And so one, this lesson was mainly in order to show you what this box is actually change when it comes to the PCE project. But also how much they also change when it comes to the properties of the Views as well. If these boxes are a little bit ago facing, you can actually choose to browse for a different template when creating any projects. So you don't actually have to use this template wherever you're using the metric one for the imperial one 24. Opening Views Using Annotations: In Revit, as you might have noticed, there are two different ways for you to navigate through your projects. So you can use, for example, the Project Browser in order to open the Views that you create it. As well as you can use Control plus tap on the keyword in order to cycle through all the abuse that you are already open. However, there is another way in which you're going to open up View Front another View, and this one is by using the annotations. So the default annotations that are greater than the Templates allows you to open a beer, run another view. So in case I the floor plans, they are able to double-click this part of the annotation in order to open the corresponding elevation. And you can use this patient in order to open the corresponding mu. Which means that you can select this part of the notation in order to open this section. However, send them for you to notice is that the correspondent be my first to another, be under the same category. Which means that if you're using an architectural floor plan, they're going to be opening the elevations of the same category, which in this case is Architecture. In the same thing it's going to apply to these sections. So there'll be that you open is going through the pen on the category that you're using. Now this might not seem by US workforce. However, in Revit, you actually create different views for different purposes under different categories. Which means they are only going to be grading, but I'm Views, sections and elevations. So once you start adding the details as well as the other categories of your projects, you are going to notice that this will become very useful. And also this is a way then you can employ, depending just on the Project Browser, especially when you start grading the Sheets. So it followed this being said, please type in Navigation will become very useful From the moment they have start your projects. Because at the annotations that you use on the levels and applying Views 25. Placing the Grids: My morgan, your projects might not. The most important elements that you will be using is the Grids. And this is because the Grids can be used as reference my placing the elements, sign or monitor your projects by using the Grids. And you are going to notice how important is to know how to replace and use the Grids. This lesson is going to be about hyperplanes and edit the Grids. Songwriter go to the Architecture tab, or more specifically, the datum Panel in order to use peccary to argument, which is a tool that you can also use by essentially essential and hours. And Romeo wants to use these to recommend. They are going to see that Draw Panel with a few tools, as well as an option, the Options bar, and a few Properties. So by default you're going to notice they are able to draw the Grids by his underlying. And they're also, they're going to be able to draw consecutive Grids based on the previous one. Which means that you can use to separate our friends at great the already graded. But also you can rotate the grid, one drawing the great as well, since you're able to use the line near going to notice they're also able to draw the grid by using the star and radius heart, able to track array by using an ark. And while you send New York, you are going to notice a few things. One of them is that the Options on the ABC transport are based on the tools you're using in order to draw the Grids. But also these tools are use the same way that you would use them when drawing, for example, a line. This means that you can use options such as Thi upset and the radius, which also means that you cannot use the upset and the radius are the same time. However, if you use the radius, you're going to choose this star and the end of the grid. So because of this, the radius may appear like it doesn't apply any changes. Now PSICQUIC Center integrates and rabin are composed of deadline and the bubbles and other problems or the families they are used on both ends of the great. While the line for line are the ones that I created, where do they use the bubbles coordinate as well? There is another article you can use in order to draw the grid, which is the one that is called center. And so you will be able to use this Hananiah to draw the grid based on a center. Or in another words, you select the center of the ER and then you just throw the yard, which is actually more useful if you select the radius that you want to use from the beginning. A quick signer, none other tools or commands and the Draw Panel actually change regardless of the US. However, with the elements such as the grave, they don't need many of the options that they have. Because decorate this a reference and an annotation, which means they're not an element we are going to use in order the grader shape like with the lines. Now the same time you're going to notice that you can add agreed to a project you're working on by just simply using the option that is called PICC lines. What this means is that if you have elements such as the Walls on your project, you are going to be able to create the grid by using PICC lines, or more specifically, by selecting the lines that this option to actually recognize. The lines where you can select the edges and centerline of the Wall as well. When using PICC lines, as you remember, you can actually lock the line to the element by checking where it says log on the Options bar. In this case, are going to notice that the Walls men actually determine the position of the Grids. Which means that the grid is the one that actually determines the position of the wall. This is because the grave is intended as the main reference of the elements that you could write a New Project. Now as well, when you place the Great Southern important for you to know is that Robin recognizes my name. There was Views on the previous Greek, which means that if you create a new grade, is going to continue the sequence based on the previous grade, which is the reason why this grid has this number. If I change the name of the grade that you're going to see how Revit is going to continue naming the grades based on the name that I selected for the previous grade. Which is sent and that is going to apply even if you delete the Grids. You are going to see that if you need to reset, they sequenced juice need to rename the group before creating another great. Additionally, this is something that you get into biasing Control C. Or in another words, you can go back to a point before adding more Grids as well. There are different ways in which you can change the name of the grave of your join or projects. One of them is by use and the blue numbers on the grid. You can select the grid and then use the properties in order to change the grip as well. Since you're able to create the grades based and equate to Pergamon. You're also going to see where you can create a query based on the Copy tool on the modify panel, which means that this is an element, but you can add up to an extent. So you can edit the placement agree. But you cannot break the gray paint a multiple grades the same way. The the with the lines. So even the tools that you can use for the Grids are limited by the function of the Grids. And this is because they are used as references and annotations as a quick sign in cases in which you have multiple grades on your drawing, you might want to change the name of multiple grades by using the properties. And this is speakers. You are going to be isn't the same grade or multiple views or just because of the size of the Projects. Now with this in mind, able to change a little bit how you create the Grids, my pen on the options that you're using. How are you going to notice that regardless of the options that you use, you have a reference at the beginning and at the end of the green line. Now this one extra is because decorates can actually align with the other, which means that all the grades can align. Pencil the grip. We're going to notice that you have this second at both ends of the grapes when you have multiple Grids. If you use this controls for grades are going to change the extension at the same time. Now this is something that you can avoid if you remove the alignment. Or in another words, if you click on this icon, if you do this, you will remove the alignment until the moment Leo enabled the alignment. Once again, by changing the extent of the grid line. However, you're going to notice that this also depends on how you draw the Grids. And this is because you can draw the grades. You send the arcs. They are expanding online for the Grids start grading. My son lines are PICC lines. As far as I'm important for you to say, instead of grades actually have controls, they can be used not only am to the Views per entry, the Views. So you will not only have controls about N, So the grid lines as well as the control close to the problem. But also you will find additional controls if you open the 3D view. So the 3D view, you're going to notice that you will have controls that will allow you to change the extension of the grid line for now 3D view. However, if you use this controls, you are going to remove the alignment. And this is because the alignment is disabled by default under 3D views as well, these controls are important because there's controls also allows you to control the extension, the levels in which you want to say the Grids. Which means that you will have controls similar to the Walls in order to change how far you're going to see the great you are going to be able to use in order to control the visibility of the Grids. Now, as well as I mentioned before, there are controls that you can use in order provided a great, one of these controls actually allows you to show or hide the problem by using this check box. And you will be able to show are high the bubbles on the Grids. And this is something that is also going to apply to the treaty abuse. As well as a quick sign on the grades are going to be very useful when add dimensions for your projects. And this is because they are use as references, which means that the dimensions recognize is the Grids. Which also means that will recognize the endpoints of the grid lines. In Revit, the dimensions are going to work very similar to the dimensions in aggregate, the Grids can be used as reference for the dimensions like they do in a software such as hurricane. So as you can notice, that Grids actually allows you to have a lot of control, not only from the placement and the appearance of the crib, but also on how they're going to be using New Project. The grades are actually very simple, but they're also very complex, are the same thing as well throughout this course who are going to see they're also different ways that you will be able to use the Grids, saving a lot of time when grading elements, such as the Walls 26. Editing the Grids: When I'm working in Revit, you migrate a project in which you will not be able to use standard Grids are in another words, grades that are graded by using the standard tools that you have under troponin. So because of this, rabbit allows you to use a two argument that is called multi-segment grid, which is a tool that will allow you to draw I crave bias and the tools or commands on the Draw Panel. And what this means is that you will be able to use these tools as you normally will interrupt to draw that path that the grid is going to follow. So this is going to allow you to create a grade as singular segment or a singular path, which is the reason why this option is called multi-segment grid. So I'm going to draw multiple segments for this green before clicking on the green check. And once I finished this drawing, I'm just going to click on the green check so you can see the result. And as you might have noticed, there is always going to be pretty much the same as any standard grid. Which means that the controls are going to function the same way as any other Grids. However, they are going to be a few differences, such as, for example, the fact that our multi-segment can be so easily use as a reference when placing another grave, which means that you won't be able to move the grades for the same time as you can normally do it, but the other grades. So you wouldn't need to keep this in mind when using this Grids, whether in your projects as well, you're going to notice that you can make adjustments on the quiz in order to make them look cohesive, one with the other. You are going to be able to edit the Grids as you normally would, regardless of how many segments are you using in order to create a great. Additionally, there is a control that you can use in cases in which the Grids are very close together. And this one breaks the grid line while also creating two controls that you can use to organize this annotations on your projects as well. This is something that is going to apply to the treaty Grids. So this means we are able to use this asset 3D grade. However, headed on the Grids will also allow you to see that the multi-segment Grids are pretty much independent from all the other grades, even in peer grading mastery the Grids. And this is because you create this treaty grade bias and the tools or commands that you haven't the Draw Panel. Which also means that the best way to either the extension with the grade is by actually editing in that bag of The Great. In other words, by selecting the grave and then click where it says sketch. So as you can notice, this Annotations are pretty easy to use, but they're also going to have that for the projects they are grading. So you don't have to limit your projects because of Annotations such as the Grids 27. Placing the Levels: When creating your projects in Revit, you are going to need a reference when placing the elements on your projects. And the reference that is most commonly used as the Levels. On the slides. I wanted to show you how you can place an editor Levels of your projects. The Levels are placed by using a tool that on Panel, which is the same Panel in which you find the Grids. And as you can see, these two men as a shortcut. The shortcut of these tools or commands in cellas and Larry Ellison Larry. However, these two argument is going to be disabled on the floor plans. And this is because the Levels are use as a particle of reference. Or in another words, for the high in which the elements are going to replace or use. So what this means, extending in order to use these to recommend, you will need to open an elevation view or Section B. So in this case, I'm going to use this beard in order to place the level. After selecting these two men on that I don't Panel, you're going through nowadays, but you have the Draw Panel as well as Options on the Options bar related to the tools on the Draw Panel hour, you're going to notice that you don't have many of the options that you can find when creating a model line. And this is because the Levels or a single line, or in another words, you just create one line. There is parallel to the reference plane that is created by the origin project. Or in another words, let's see what Zero hope you Project. Now placing the level as such, it's actually pretty easy because you just need to select with a mouse where you're going to start and where your level is going to end. In. In order to make this easier, you can actually use the aromatic dimensions. So the automatic dimensions will allow you to place the level a little bit easier. But also since you have Options in the Options bar, they're going to be able with a sign how you want to place the Levels by also changing the upset, GI, upset and the aromatic dimensions actually do something very similar. Additionally, while placing this Levels, we're going to notice that all the Levels are graded the same way, meaning that you only select the beginning and the anecdotal level. Because the Levels of place horizontally, meaning that these lines I know created based on an angle. This is something that applies even if you use the other option that you've had on the Draw Panel. So what this means is that if you use big lines, you're going to notice that the reference that you're using needs to be completely horizontal. So this means that you can only use are great references in your project. They're completely horizontal. Or in another words, the x-axis, which means that you can use level one as the reference plane, the Revit users, in order to grade your projects, as long as you don't change the height of level one. So even if you're create a line that has an angle, Revit is now going to be able to grade the level with an NGO or inclination. So regardless of the way in which a grade level, the level is always going to be horizontal. Once you created the Levels, you are going to notice a few similarities with the Grids. One of them is that the Levels also aligned when we the other, which means very few online or the Levels, you will be able to move on then Levels at the same time as well. They can use a separate reference, the endpoints of the other levels. So what this means is that you can perfectly aligned order level. So you project the Views in which you can see the level. However, sending for you can nowadays is that the Levels there I just created will not align with the Levels recreated with a template. Now once that the Levels arcuated, you are going to see that if you select any of these levels, you will have properties that you can change. But also you're going to see the actual height of the level based on the sera, sera. Sera, sera is refers to interrupt me as Thi origin on your project. So you can refer to the sera, sera as theory Georgia Project and vice versa. So these Pali that you haven't, the properties by T4 is going to be the absolute value of the high. This one is going to update every time that you change by hydrogen Levels. Now you can change my hierarchy levels in different ways. One of them is by using the aromatic dimensions. So you can change the spelling in a rapid change the height of the level. Now as well, since the Levels are actual objects are placed on your project, then you're going to notice that you can also use the tools or commands you have on the modified panel as well. Since you have property basically you can change you can also change the value of the elevation by using the properties. However, if use the properties, you will need to know the absolute elevation that you want to use on the level. Additionally, there is a few other ways in which you can change the height of the level, which you won't be able to see unless they are using Family Types. Similar Well, the one that came with a template. So in order to use the same family pay for the rest of the Grids, you have to recommend many SCO, much type Properties. I'm going to go to the Modify tab in order to use this to argument. Now these two argument and also be used by using a shortcut, which is semester married as an apple. Now this tool is the one that you use when you went to Change the Family Types of an element based on another element. So in other words, you change the Family Types of the elements that you selected based on your first Selection. And I PSICQUIC Sina, the ACO will let you know why tries to Family Types that you want to match through the other ones. Now, once that I changed the family tie, you are going to notice when now you have the same text on, on the Levels. So with this, you are going to be able to change the height of the Levels by using the notation. If you click on this Pali, you're going to be able to add a bit by using the keyword, which is the same thing that you can do. Very center Properties. In another words, this value reflux and absolute value based on this your serum. And that's a quick sign-on since you can use the tools or commands, we have anamorphic Panel, you can also press and drag that level by using the mouse. So you will have more than one way in order to mobile level. And as well, something for you to notice is that the Levels also have names. So you can change the value of the high, but also the name of the level as well. There's more than one way in which you can do this. So you can simply use the proper place in order to change the name of that level. But also you're going to be able to use the innovation. So if you click on this Palin, you're going to be able to change the name of the level by using the keyword as well as any important for you can notice the fact that Levels, instead the Levels have reference planes. Which means that even though that Levels are represented by a line, this line actually represents the plane that is use in order to place the elements on your projects. Which is the reason why by default you have level one at serum or in another words, based on the origin. So level one is normally used as the reference plane of your project. Or in another words, you didn't change the height of level one unless you have to. Let this means that if you literally any of these levels also going to be deleting the reference plane that is use in order to place the elements of your project. So this means that if you delete a level that is being used as a reference product elements, you might even the only element that uses that level, not only as a reference, but I suppose as well, another similarity between the Levels and the grades. Instead, the Levels also take into account available decorator before, which means that the Levels going to be named based on the previous level. However, in the case of the Levels, my name is going to change. They can also into account handling missing level, which means that Revit also tries to help you avoid enemies and level, which might not seem very useful. First, until you start grading projects with multiple levels. High multiple changes are in another words, projects, but take a lot of time and a lot of updates, which is also going to be very useful rewarding projects with somebody else because he's going to let you know if there has been any drastic changes for the Levels of the Projects mass. While something for you to know is that the Levels can be seen under 3D views. If I open a 3D view, also going to be able to see that Levels of the project. So if I select any of these levels, you are going to notice that now the representation level is the same one off a reference plane. But also you're going to see that there is a free controls that you can use. And these controls will allow you to change the extension of Pella, among other things. Now something that you're going to notice with this Levels, a statistic Levels change the extension of all the Levels recreated by using the Levels like a with a template. Which means that the Levels can also be considered to the Levels entry the Levels as well centered for you to know is that the reason why you can change the extent of this level that I graded. It's because I graded a level by using the copy to recommend another level which extend can be edited on a 3D view. In another words, by using the Copy tool on a level that can be consider a treaty level as well. They're going to say, but you've got controls that you can use in order to change more than just the extension of the Levels. You can use this control in order to check if you want to use the adaptation at the beginning of the level. Now this annotation is another patient that is greater for the Levels. So by default, templates that are grayed out of this will have an annotation just for the Levels. And as I mentioned before, there greater have three the Levels into the Levels. Now there is not an actual difference between the levels are adequate bias into the Views and the Levels. They're edited by century the Views. Except for the fact neither to the Levels, change the Levels, the abuse of your projects. However, you're not able to do this from the 3D view. While the treaty Levels allows you to change the extension of the Levels by using any of the Views of the project, including the 3D view. So it doesn't really matter if you're using the to the Levels, 3D Levels. Because when you create a Sheets, you ever abuse based on this, basically having the shapes. So you will still need to add the extension of the Levels once you start grading the Sheets for your project. All these beans said, Levels on your projects are very important for you to know how to use, because they are use as reference and also as a host, pardon me, elements we're going to place on your projects 28. The Importance of the Grids and the Levels on the Projects: When working in your projects, we're going to see then the Levels and that Grids are equally important because both of them are use as reference for the elements that you can place on your project. So I'm going to place a few, create some this project by using the Greek, the same way that I would place them if it was an actual project. Also going to rename the Grids. However, going to place any Levels because they are already graded on this template. And as a quick center, the shortcut for the degree to cricket man, ACSM, George Harrison bromine. So once that you have the Levels and the Grids, you are going to see how you will be able to use them when placing elements such as the Walls. So if I use the Wall to recommend, you're going to say that I able to the PSI, the Levels that I want to use as a reference for the base of the wall, but also the top of the wall. While others same time, I can use the Grids as a reference when deciding where the Walls are going to replace. So you're going to notice that the Levels and the Grids work together as well. You are going to be able to notice that some elements will allow you to make changes based on the Levels or the Grids after we have already been placed bias and the proper place. So throughout the course you're going to see that when you place elements such as the Walls, you're going to have not only the option to the side, how you're going to place the Walls, but also you're going to be able to identify the placement of the wall Properties. Now this is also important because you can actually change the values there is on the Levels. And this Levels in return will also change the elements related to them. Which means that if the Walls are use another level as a reference. Or in another words, since I've constrained in changing the height of that level, will also change the height of the Wall. Now as well. This is also very useful because you can even create elements when you're project without actually using a view in which you can see the elements that you're placing your project. However, Revit is going to let you know if you're placing one element on top of the other. So rarely can even let you know if there is double counting or a foreign element is within another. So this is going to be very useful in cases in which you're working on different levels at the same time. How are so you remember, you can still change certain things about the Levels and the Grids. Suggest, for example, the extension of the Grids or how far you're going to see the grid as well. Since Revit, users parameter and the elements that make the project, hey, you can select the elements in different Views and there will still be selected in other bees. Which means that you can select different elements on the family is at the project, including the 3D views. So editing a project because more practical than in some other supports. So all this means that Levels and the Grids will be very important throughout your projects, especially because of how they are use as reference for the other elements that you will need to place on your projects. Sunday software and the Levels and the Grids picker an even more important than in other supports 29. Placing the Walls: So now we're going to see what is so well wooden rabbit. So the first thing that you need to know is how to create the wall. So in order to do this, you go to the Architecture tab and then on the bill panel, you collect the world to recommend or do you just simply use the shortcut W, some water AS and ample once they have done this, the first thing that you're going to notice is that you have in the modifying the drawing tools which you can use in order to draw the wall. Now the reason why you use the drawing tools in order to create the war is that the wall is actually created by using a pad and a profile. The path is the one that you draw by using the drawing tools. But the profit is automatically created by the family that is selected when you create the wall, as well as something for you to know. We're working with the world's history. You are able to modify the properties of the wall before creating the wall and after grading the wall. So the way that you can quickly change the properties of the wall before placing the wall is by using the options bar. So as you notice, while placing the wall, the options that you have on the options bar are going to be greater. Now if we go to the 3D view, you're going to see the result are the default values for the default properties that are selected when creating the walls. However, if you go to the Options bar, you are going to notice a slight difference. When it comes to the Options bar on the floor plan. Compare it to the 3D view. So I'm going to create the following woe by using the 3D view. Whereas what I'm going to start showing you where you can change by using the options bar, such as the level, which is something that you can change by using the options bar before drawing a wall. Now the level is one of the properties are parameters that define the placement the wall. However, there is another property or parameter that you can use in order to define the placement the wall. So after raising the walls, I'm going to create another wall by using the 3D view. In this case, I'm going to change the placement of the wall from height to which will allow you to place the wall based on the level. However, the barren metal wall is going to be based on the tab and the top of the wall is going to be based on the level which is the opposite of the height. Now taking that in mind, we're going to look a little bit closer to the constraints that make the wall. So when place in the world, you have noticed that you have the placement level and also you have the depth and the height. Now this implies that you can use a level as a constraint. Let's tear verbally. So you have a top constraint and about unconstrained. In this case, n square using the desktop constraint is level two. So if I change the option and disrupt them to level one, the parent constraint is going to be level one. As a quick reminder, this works the same way when it comes to the high. However, if you use the height, the barn constraint is going to be level two and the unconnected high is going to be the value on the textbox right next to and connected. And it would change the drop-down from level one to unconnected. And then we change the value on the options bar. You're going to notice that the constraint of the war is still going to be level two when it comes to the top constraint. However, on the bottom is going to remain unconnected, but it's going to have the value that you type on the textbox right next to and connect it. So this is a way to use the Options bar in order to define how high you want the world to go. So I'm going to delete this walls in order to place another wall by changing the values to how I normally use them. So in the options we're going to select Hide, and I'm going to sell when it comes to the level of O2. But on this case, I'm going to be using a different option that is called location line. And the location line is actually a drop-down where you can actually use in order to select the location of the line in order to draw the path for the wall. So I'm on this options, we're going to have the world center line, the core certain line, the finished phase exterior, the finished facing theorem, the core face exterior and the current facing theorem. So in order to show you the difference, I'm going to do a couple of things. The first thing that I'm going to do is sexually makes sure that at a detailed level is going to be on fine. And then I'm going to need to select a wall that we can use in order to see the difference between the options that we have for the location of the center line. So in this case I'm going to use this brick wall. And by using the default option, that is, well center line, you're going to have the wall being drawn by us and the center of the wall. And by using the next option, which is called central line, you're going to have something a little bit different, which is that the wall is going to be drawn based on the core layer of the wall. If we use the next option. Which has finished basics theorem, we're going to see that the world actually changes based on the option, which is based on another layer or the wall, which is the finished. Now we haven't seen the layers up to this point. However, you're going to notice the ones that you're going into the Layers. You are going to have a layer for the finish and then layer there is for the core of the wall, which pretty much means that you have an a structural layer and I finished layer. And the options for the finish will also apply to the core or the wall. So these options are going to be slightly different based on the properties of the wall. Or in another words, based on the profile of the wall. Although the difference is going to be pretty small in some cases, the location line might not seem very important at first. However, depending on your country or region, the location line will save you a lot of time migrating your project, especially the finished phase exterior and the finish facing theorem. So because of this, you're going to see that it changes. How you place an editor was like writing a project is in rabbit. Now the remaining options that you have on the options bar are very related one to the other. So if I delete the walls and we use once again the wall or command, you're going to notice that by default you have a check where it says chain, you have the upset as zero. You don't have a check where he says radius and you have adjoint status with a default value for loud. So if you draw the world by using these values, you're going to notice that you are able to change the walls. If you uncheck this option, you will need to create one segment at a time, as well as things he used the draw panel. You're going to see that some of these options are the same they have when drawing a line. And among the same options, you are going to find the upset and the radius. So you can add an object to the wall before drawing the walls, which also means that you can also select a radius for the coordinates before drawing the wall. Now be upset is pretty similar to the radius. And the sense that if you check on the radius, you are going to be able to type in a value that is going to create a radius. However, to be upset is going to be grayed out. So this means that you can only use the offset if you don't apply it on radius, inner radius, if you don't apply the upset. Now, destroying that I crave is automatically chained together because I'm actually using a rectangle. Now as I mentioned before, the rectangle automatically change the worlds together. So you don't actually need to use the option to chain because the rectangle actually creates the wall already chained together. This time I actually changed the Join Status from allowed to disallow. You're going to see that the walls are chained together, but the walls are actually not join together. And this is something that we will not change regardless of the extensions of the world, unless you click on this icon in both of the walls, which pretty much does the same thing as using the join status Allow before creating the walls. All this being said, you're going to see a place in the world is actually very simple. Even with all the options that you have before you were in place in the world. 30. Wall Properties: Main driveway. You are going to notice that when you create a wall, you will have the options bar, as well as the properties. And the Options bar will actually have a few values are properties that you can only change before placing the wall, such as e.g. they change status. While the properties will have a few other properties that you can change based on the options bar. However, the options and the properties will be greater while drawing the wall. So the main difference between the options and the proper base is the fact that you can change the properties of the wall, not only before grading the wall, but our software creating the wall. So before creating the world, you're going to notice they are going to be able to change properties such as the top constraint, but also my location line. Once that the wall has been graded, you are going to be able to see where you can select either the walls in order to change the proper place. So you can change the location line after creating the wall. Which also means you can also change the type constraint as well as the base constraint after placing the wall. So you are going to be able to change how the world actually behaves based on the levels. Nasa gouache say no, my possession of the controls and the walls are based on their location line. So you can get an idea of which one is being used on your project, even whether the properties as well selling for you to know, is that depending on your country or region, you my name and a specific one, especially on countries they use as they see your face. So the wall for the grids, so you will be able to use we finish phase exterior when you place the walls after placing the grids as well, you're going to notice that you have at the pub sub n also a base upset. So you can also add an upset to the top constraint, base constraint. While at the same time you can see that the values can be positive or negative. So you can use negative values and positive values depending on your design. Now with this in mind, the relationship between the wall and then levels is going to remain the same if you're using the levels and second strain. So I see nowadays the properties of the wall are very easy to change. 31. The Slanted Cross Section Definition: On this lesson, I want to show you a proper PPE available on the walls. And this one is called cross-section. This is a property that you can use before and after creating the world. So after using the world to our command, you can simply go to the proper place and then go to where it says cross section definition in order to change the cross section from particle to Atlanta. And once I have done this, you're going to see that the wall has an inclination and the default value of disinclination will be zero. So if I change the angle from vertical, you will be able to see that there is going to be a change on the wall as well, something for you to see instead now the texts that you have on the wall has also changed. So this means that you can type in the value and the properties as well as change in the Pali on these texts as well. Something for you to notice is that you can use positive values and negative values where the inclination, however, this doesn't mean that you can now go back, but part of the Cobra session phase and the drop-down, you will be able to go back and forth between Atlanta and particle at any point as well. The Atlantic wall can actually be used regardless of the wall and regardless of the design of the wall. Which means that you will be able to gray, befriend the signs for your projects. So the assumption will allow you to change their parents or the wall, but also it will allow you to adjust the wall for your design, which is something that you had to do a little bit differently from Persia separately, but you might not have used nowadays grading walls. His sexual lot more easier and convenient. Which means that you will be able to save time because you won't have to create the walls by using other tools or commands that you have to use before the addition of this property. And this also means that you can use this cross-section, the walls that are created by using the tools on the top panel. The walls will maintain their shape, even if you draw the wall by a center circle and the ellipse, a quick sign, you are going to notice that probably is going to let you know if you're selecting elements of the same type, there are now using the same values on the properties. I stare at the values probably is going to have something different. So in the case otherwise, you're going to say if you are using different constraints, location lines, and so on as well, there will be a few things for you to notice when you send this cross-section. One of them is that depending on the design they are using, the inclination angle is going to change. So this means that sometimes the walls will go to the interior, while in some cases the wall will go to the exterior. Now as well. So if we do notice is that the inclination angle are not going to be affected by the direction of the wall. So the direction of the wall doesn't have anything to do with the result. So the one thing that you need to keep in mind is actually the value that you're using. Or in another words, when they are using a positive value or a negative value. And also when grading the walls, you are going to see that you can actually use a different cross section for walls of the same type, which means that the cross-section is not dependent on the family type. So you can use a different cross section on walls. They're using the same family time. Which also means that you can use different values for the angle of inclination on different walls of the same type. However, even if the wall is using a different cross section, the way that the wall actually functions remains the same. Which means you can change the value of the height, but also better constraint. However, you do have to give in mind if revenue is going to be able to gray the result of the values that are changing the properties. So what this means is that the walls will need to be able to create a shape. And this is something that applies regardless if you're using the wall and connect or connected to any of the levels. However, if you connect it to a level, the level is the one that will define their parents of the wall. So you don't have to keep in mind how you're using the walls in your project. A quick sign up for this profile does not actually change the orientation of the wall based on the angle or the slope. And this is because the wireless is still adjusting to the constraints. However, when it's being used as a host of other elements, such as doors and windows. And those elements are placed using the same angle or slope. Now, this means we can actually do pretty much the same thing by using controls. So if you create a wall, you're going to notice that the controls will remain the same until the moment when you change the cross-section. Because once you change the cross section, you will have the same control. However, you're also going to have a control that will allow you to change the angle or inclination of the wall. So you're going to be able to use the properties, the blue numbers, or in another words, paramedic measurements, and also the controls where you have uncertain views, such as e.g. the 3D view. Now as well, depending on the video using, the control will function pretty much the same. However, is going to allow you to do a little bit more. If he is an elevation, you are going to be able to see you can change the angle of inclination, but also the extent of the wall. So with all this being said, this cross section in section per useful and very easy to use and the walls, because you're only going to be adding one additional value, which is the angle or inclination of the wall. 32. Wall Layers: Now, as I mentioned before, the world circulating by using a pet in a profile. So now I'm going to show you how to modify the profile. Now you can use the default walls that already have a profile by just simply using the world to recommend. Or you can change the profile, the wall by just simply selecting the wall and then you send the type selector in order to change the world. I like changing the world tight and just going to place a wall on this project. And then I go into open another view of the project in which the wall can be appreciated a little bit better. But also going to make sure that you can see all the layers of the wall by changing the detail level of this beer. While the world is select them, I'm going to use the properties palette in order to open the type properties window. However, in this case, what I'm going to do is go to the construction section in order to click on Edit right next to where it says a structure. And this will allow you to open their assembly window. Now within this window, we are going to find information about the type, but also you're going to find the layers that make the wall now within this layer. So you're going to see all the layers that make the wall organized by exterior and interior of the wall, dividing by the cold wall. The wall is the course structure. And as you remember, this one is used in order to determine the position of the location line. Now, a quick explanation. The exterior site is the one that is grading for this theorem of your project. Which means that the anterior side is the one for the interior of your project. While the core is the structure layer or this workshop part of the wall. Now this doesn't mean that you can not assign the layers anyway you want. So by closing the edit assembly window and the type properties window, I can go to ethanol plant in order for you to see. Now this layers are organized within the project. So by using the flood control on the wall, you're going to see how the exterior layers the warrant up are now oriented to the interior of the project. Now segue to say no, we're going to notice that these layers are nothing more than the materials they use and the construction of your project. Now I'm just going to change the view to see a little bit better. They changes under layers. Also going to select the wall before opening. Once again, the type properties window. In order to show you some of the options that you have available when it comes to the layers. Starting first by the fact that you can insert a new layer to the wall. You can delete right away. But also, you can organize the layers by using the options for up or down, depending on the position, the one for this layers. Now swirl lesson. Notice when it comes to this layers, you have a column for the numbers, a column for the function, a column for the material, a column for the thickness. A column with a checkbox that is called wraps. And also another column with a checkbox for this virtual material. But as well the layer and then number is equal to the position of the layer and the floodplain. So if the world was an imperative that the order of these layers will be equal to the order that you will be able to see within this view. Now in order to update the changes, just need to click on Okay, and then apply and then okay. So we can make further changes or we can undo the changes. Now as well. Some important for you to know is that the function actually determines whether the layer should go. So the Finnish should always be under number one, but also on the list. So as you notice, the layers are very specific because they actually use an order, but also they use function material thickness among other properties. So if we look a little bit closer to the functions, you're going to see what functions do we have available in which we have this structure, which is the one that we used for the core. This subtract, which is the second one. When it comes to hierarchy. Then we have the thermal hair layer, which is the third one before they finish. In which we have one finished for the exterior and one finished for the theorem. That's why we have a membrane layer that doesn't have any priority. Because as the name implies, is a membrane that is designed with different functions. So he noted our priority. The core is the first. The substrate is going to be above the core and below the core. And after that you're going to have the thermal layer based on decide that you want to isolate. And then you're going to have the finished on the exterior side and maybe a finished on the anterior side. Now this doesn't mean that you cannot play around with the layers that you want to use, the pen around the world they are creating. These are the basic functions that applies to the layers that make the wall. And you can always use as an example, there was there already created within revenue. Now something for you to know as well is that if you are a little bit confused when it comes to the placement or layers, when in the world, you're going to actually use the option for premium, which will allow you to see a preview of the wall. But also it will allow you to change the view that you want to use in order to see this preview. Which will also include the option to use the stairwell in order to navigate throughout the view as well. You can use this some options by using the preview, something as well for you to notice is they are aiming to change the value of the sample high by using this textbox. So as you can see where this window, you will be able to see the changes that you do to the walls by using the preview instead of looking at the wall, rather abuse or the project. And science is a preview which changes will not apply until you click on Apply and then okay, another type properties window as well. We can use the edit assembly window in order to open the material browser by clicking right next to the material. So by opening this window, we're going to be able to select, edit the material that is used for a particular layer. But also we can change the family type, may send the type properties window as with any other element, which also means that we can duplicate the wall as well. We can rename the wall in order to make the family the way using different from the other ones, right? In another words, you can create a unique family type. This means that we can open the edit assembly window in order to modify the parameters for this wall without changing the other family types. So I'm just going to go ahead and close this window in order to drywall you send a new family type. All these means. You're going to notice that editing the layers, it's actually pretty simple once you get used to the options that you have on the edit assembly window. So at first, this might seem confusing. However, the most important options that you will need to keep in mind our insert belly up, down their location line. But also how you want to add in each layer. 33. The Stacked Wall Family System: In very, very severe way for you to combine multiple worlds without actually using multiple types. And this is by actually using a different wall system. And this system is called a stack. Well, so after placing the wall, I'm just going to change the family Thai waste and the type selector. And I'm going to select this family type parish already using the Extract wall family system. Now once that I use this family type, you're going to see a couple of things. One of them is that you have to family types, one on top of the other. But also you are going to notice that both family types are actually very different. And this is because of how they are graded. Which means that a family types are graded on an S-type wall are not limited by the structure. That is, you sum those family types. However, if you open the type properties window while this wall is selected, you are going to notice that the structure of this wall is actually composed of these two walls as well. You are going to see that there is a few differences between the structure of a basic wall compared to this type well, such as e.g. the upset. The option will allow you to change how the walls are justified on this family type. Now as well, there are going to be a few standard values, such as the sample height. Now, when it comes to the actual structure, you are going to notice that you're able to insert more family types to this type well, but also where the placement is going to be based on which family pie you're selecting. So the answer will place a new family type on top of the existing one. And as well, it's going to use that same family time that you selected. Now suppose something for you to notice is that you can change the value of the variable. And that variable will allow you to use the remaining height of the wall, which means that you only need to specify only the values that you want to sell this type well, so you only have to worry about some of the family ties they are using. While the other one will just simply use the remaining value. Which is something that can be very useful when you have another family tie on the bottom. Since you're adding additional family types to this type, whoa, you can also change how they are organized by clicking where it says. Now with this in mind, we're going to say that by default, one of the family types will have an exact value, while the other one will be variable as well. You can do a few other things such as e.g. changing the direction of the family pack. So if you check where it says fully, you will flip the direction of the wall on this family type. Now this is actually going to be based on the observed that you're using. Now the options that you have on the upside or the same options that you have on the alignment. And this is because the opposite is actually based on the alignment. With this in mind, you are going to be able to see where you have values that you can use in order to change even more stark wall, such as e.g. the absurd, that and the base. Now these values will depend on the complexity. We start. Well, in many cases, it might not get to use them. Now since this type wall is composed of two or more types, you're going to see very few select this Type wall, and then you use the right leg on the mouse. In order to open this menu, you are going to be able to change the world. So orientation, which is something that you can also do by using one of the controls on the wall. But also you are going to have v option that is called breaker in order to buy their stock wall or in another words, integrator break this type wall into individual elements. So we are going to be able to see on the type selector the same family types that were being used on this type. Well, now if you want to reverse this, you can simply use Control C or you can use the type selector in order to change the family time where it's being used. How one of these wells. This means say you can actually see on your project how this type well, actually looks like as well. A few things for you to notice about this type wall is how it's actually used as a hose for other elements, such as the doors are the windows. So with this in mind, you're going to notice that if he plays e.g. at, or they start, wall is going to recognize the door, which means that the door is going to be placed as it should be even on a stark wall. And this means that you will be able to avoid making adjustments on the doors after placing them on a stack. Well, so it called this been saying this step, well, it's actually pretty useful. However, since the use of this type, well, it's going to be based on the project that you won't get to see everything that you can do on this type wall unless they are actually working on a project or the sine. And the requires you to create and instead, well, that is actually more complex than this one. 34. Wrapping Options: In revenue, you're able to change the appearance of the worlds on the plan views that this is something that you will be mainly using on the floor plans. And this is because you will be able to change how the layers interact with the elements, where you can add to the woes, as well as how the world's may interact with each other. And the way they do this is by using that type properties window. So after selecting a wall, able to use the type properties window in order to change the wrapping settings. Now the wrapping settings are only appreciable and actually useful when you have a wall but multiple layers. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to add a few layers to this. Well, once that I have done this, we're going to see how these layers are going to be perceived not only by using the type properties, but also by using these floodplain. However, if you don't want it too is you can simply use our type that is already graded. So instead of editing and you will tie, I can just simply use this trap them in order to select an existing family type. Since this is actually based on the layers of the wall, that the direction of the layer is also going to affect the appearance of the world. But more importantly, you are going to see that the elements that you can place on the wall actually change the appearance of the wall. If I place this element, the wall, just going to select the wall in order to open. Once again, I type properties window to show you how the different settings on the rubbing inserts are going to change their parents or the wall. So I'm going to start first place and the rapid inserts, or more specifically, by using the options that you haven't disrupted. So I'm going to show you how all these three options change the appearance of the wall independently. Now something that you can notice is that both asexually the one that you might be using the most because it changes the wrapping on the interior and the exterior of the wall. Same thing, which is actually pretty useful if you're using the same finish on the interior as well as the exterior. And now I'm just going to continue with the options that you have where he says, wrapping up here, you're going to notice that you only have exterior and interior. However, exterior and interior will not allow you to see a change on the appearance of the wall right away. This is because you're only going to be able to see a change at the end of the world. So you are going to notice this will only change the appearance of the walls that actually is in the rapping at the end of the wall. So you will need to make sure they are using their family type that you want to use for the year, using the wrapping that ends with a family five years selected as well. Something for you to notice is the rapid that ends does not only extend to the end of the row horizontally, but also vertically. Which means that the webinar ends also allows you to grab the wall on the top of the wall. So you won't be able to see this on every other project because most other bills, that wall is pink. And even on the 3D view, you need to use a visual style that will allow you to see the material that is being used on the exterior of the wall. Which will be actually pretty useful and 3D views. But also when you want to change, her parents were warm. Air is actually not being kept by the B. Or in another words, how well that it's now going to display all the layers of the wall because it's below the cap plane of the beam. Something that also uses, like you would use it on floor plans, drawn by hand. Now the standard value of the plane is 1.2 m. All this being said You're right, we notice that you're able to change. The walls are going to be represented under different views of the project. So depending on the EU and also in the project, you will be able to change the wrapping in order to adjust the walls. 35. Editing the Wall Profile: The wall. So you can create in Ruby, have a lot of options and proper basically you can use in order to change their parents so the wall but also how the wall is going to be used, such as e.g. the structure of the wall. However, there is another option that you can use. Main editor change the shape of the wall based on a profile. If you select the wall, they're going to be able to edit the profile, the wall. Now once the acrylic resets at the profile, you're going to have the current profile, the wall, as well as the tools are commands they have on the draw panel. So what this means is that you can use the tool circumvents and the drop panel in order to change the profile of the wall. And as well, since you are going to be able to use the same tools or command center drop panel. You're also going to be able to use the same tool circumvents that you have on the modify panel. So you're going to be able to draw an editor drawing in order to edit the profile of this wall. And once they've finished editing the profile, you can simply click on the green check in order to validate the change. Now once they either this, we're going to see the appearance of the wall has changed. But also you're going to see a few other things. So just e.g. the hidden line that represents the boundary of the wall. And in order to edit the profile of the wall, to just have to select a wall and then click once again where it says Edit perfect. Now, once that I have done this, you are going to notice that the boundary of the wall whole swap ears when editing the profile of the world, which means that this hidden lines actually represent the boundary of the world. Now with this being said, you can always change the profile of the wall while editing the profile. But also once you edit the profile, you are going to see that these controls are going to change based on the new profile, the wall. So you're going to be able to use these controls in order to change the appearance of the wall. However, you are going to notice that there are few changes that Robbie n or gray. Which means that if you are at a wall in certain ways, rabbit will just simply let you know that it will delete the wall. So you do have to keep in mind, what can I change this? Can you do by just simply using the controls? And which ones can you do why you send it to certain mass by a retina profile as well. You can undo all the changes that you have done by just simply clicking where it says reset profile. This will allow you to reset the path of the wall at any point. Now as well, you can actually edit the profile of the wall regardless or the cross section that you're using. Which means that you can change the cross section from vertical to Atlanta and still use the profile. In order to edit the profile, the wall. We're going to be able to edit the profile of the wall even if you change the inclination of the wall. However, sending for you to notice is the sense of cross section is a slander. The profile that you're editing is actually going to be based on the inclination. So what this means is that you can edit a proffer before changing inclination. But also you can make changes to the profile based on the design that you're using. So you will need to keep in mind if you want to edit the profile before changing the cross-section, we're actually changing the cross section as well. You can notice that you can use the profile to create different shapes by either adding or subtracting from the x system prefer, you can create something very different without so many steps. Now since this is a profile, you also have to keep in mind that the profile will need to be graded by using one single continuous line. And they're also, if you have an error such as this one, you can simply click where it says greater sketching in order to undo the changes. Now what this means, so you can still use the controls that you have, again, normally would regardless of the profile. So this means that you can use the controls that you use in a rapid change, the extent of the wall, as well as the inclination angle of the wall. However, the controls will not allow you to add the wall beyond what were we can create. So once again, you will need to keep in mind if it changes to your toe and can be done by you center controls, we will need to use and they prefer are the properties of the wall or the wall. 36. Attaching and Detaching the Walls: Now when you place the walls, he might also need to where it was based on elements such as e.g. the floors. So because of this, rabbit has a few options that you can use. Anal rectal area to the extent of the walls. So after grading these walls here are going to see that if you select any of the walls, you will have a modified panel. When the fee options are two sarcomeres, they will allow you to modify them. Wow. So in order to show you a few assumptions or to circumvents and go into crater floor the next level. So I'm going to open this floor plan in order to create a floor by floor to recommend and cosine rho into gray, the boundary of this floor based on the walls. Or in another words, I'm going to extend that boundary of this floor, pee on the walls. So once I finished floor and just going to go to appear in which I can select the walls in order to use the options that are going to cover in this lesson. We're starting first by attach the base, which is going to allow you to attach the wall to an element such as the floor. So this means that now the walls will be actually based on the placement of the Florida, which is suddenly you can reverse by just simply using the touch the base as well. Sending for you to notice is the sense this option is actually based on the boundary of the floor than the penalty on the floor. We'll need to cover that well, in order for you to attach the walls to the floor. So I'm just going to enter the Florida that I created in a way that is covering the support of the war. And after I finished the boundary, I'm just going to click on the green check. And once I do that, you can notice that not all the walls will attach to this floor. And this is because they knew boundary will not attach to this floor because at any boundary, which is one of the error messages, but you can get from rabbit. Now since you can attach the walls, the floors, you're also going to be able to attach the wall so the roofs. Which means that you can also create a rule in order to use the option or to parliamentary score attach top base. However, in the case of the rooms, you are growing an audience. The ones that you click on the green check whether it is going to allow you to attach the world's automatically. And this is because the roof is actually plays about them walls. Which also means that you'd assign the groups based on the walls. So because of this, you can use this option in order to speed up the process of integrating rooms and the walls of your project as well. Since we're able to edit the worlds by using attachments, you're also going to be able to see that there is another option that will actually let, allow you to change the profile of the wall. Or in another words, this ketchup the wall. So after I click away, says that they prefer, you are going to be able to see that you can use the two sarcomeres on this panel in order to change the profile, right? Join any profile. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to decide if you want to attach the wall to floor or eye room while also changing their profile the wall. Which also means that you can use these options at the same time. However, will let you know that it will remove the attachment on the top and the base of the wall because it needs the wall for anything, then migrate an error as well. You can also raise the profile of the wall. I click away says, we said profile. So with this basic options, we're going to be able to enter the wall based on the floors and the roofs without the need of additional options for to certain meds that you have in revenue. 37. Placing a Floor: In wrapping one or the other family systems that you will be able to use in order to create a complete project is the floors. Sunday school lessons, I'm going to show you how you can place the floors, but also how can you edit the floors. So we know that a greater floors, you need to go to the Build panel from the Architecture tab, which is the same tab in which you can find the walls. Once you select the floor to our command, you're going to notice that you have options and the options bar, as well as properties that you can change and they drop panel on the Modify tab for the floors. So what this means is they are going to be able to draw that boundary of the floor. The boundary of the floor is great advice in lines. However, in this case, baselines are consider boundary lines. So the lines that you draw in order to create the floor can only be used as boundary. The boundary lines also have a shortcut. The shortcut is a lesson learned IS in India as well. They are, the ones are selected by default. So every time the crater floor, the boundary lines are the ones that are going to be highlighted. So this means that by default, where we asked you to create first the boundary of the floor and work grading the founder of this floor. You're also going to notice that there is one line that is different from the others. And this one is used in order to determine the direction of the floor. So this line is refers to in revenue as this bond direction. Now once they've finished the boundary of the floor, they just have to click on the green check in another query, the floor. Now once the floor has been grading, you are going to see once again, now you're able to select the floor, but also you're able to see the basic information of the floor by hovering until you get this text. And if you want to enter the floor, use need to make sure that the floor is selected. You can select the option Briscoe at the boundary. Now, editing the boundary of the floor is pretty easy because you can use that tool circumvents on the modify panel, as well as the tools that you have on the top panel. However. So that's why for you to notice is that the boundary of the floor, nice to be a single continuous line, which means that I need to be close. In other words, baselines need to be chained together. Which is the reason why see certainly use basic shapes such as the rectangle. But also this is the reason why you also have available with two arguments and then Modify panel as well. You're going to say that this also applies to the shapes created inside of the boundary of the floor. Inside of the boundary of the floor. Which means that the floor also agonizes the shapes that you create inside the boundary. So you're able to gray unique shapes. You say not only the boundary, but also the space within the boundary. What is being said, since we're able to use the tool circumvents on the modify panel. You are going to be able to use these tools in order to vary the boundary of the floor. So you can have one single continuous line. So this means that you will be able to make corrections on the boundary of the floor before finishing the floor. So you don't get an error message. Once they have a single convenience line, you will be able to click on Finish in order to see the result. As you can notice by this point, the focus of this lesson is how you create the floors. So one of the things for you to notice about grading the floors is that you have an additional option under Tropicana. And this one is called Pig. Pig walls may sexually different from PICC lines because the walls are different from the lines. Which means that when you use PICC lines, they're actually going to be selecting just a line. And this is because the walls can be created by using multiple layers. So if I create the following walls, you are going to notice that pick walls is going to recognize the layers of the wall. And this is because there is an option, the options for Mary score x ten into all core. So because of this option, you are going to be able to sell a record of the wall. Now this option is available because the Cold War is a structural part of the world. Or in another words, the part of the wall. They will pray before adding the finishes to the project. So this means that you can create the floors based on this structure instead of just the finish of the project, which is actually very useful in case they are gradient a project with a structure accuracy as well. This also means that you can disable this option any point while at the same time using the option that you have on the options bar. And this assumption is the upset. You're able to run upset even when using extend toward core. Now as well, if you want to use PICC lines, you can actually do so. Now you might want to use PICC lines, because PICC lines will not only allow you to select the lines that you have available on the wall, but also will allow you to lock this lines based on the lines the worst selector on the wall. So you can edit the walls without worrying about the floor. Or in another words, it will be able to edit the floors by just simply written the walls as well. So the important for you to know is the ones you start adding multiple elements to your project. You might have to select among the different elements may have in your project. Because of this, we again use type on the keyboard in order to cycle through elements. They're very close together. But also you can use a 3D views in order to make your selection Hello easier. However, even with all the different options that you have, you might still need a different way in order to select elements such as the floors. So because it is an option in the Options bar, which allows you to select elements by phase. Which means that you will be able to select elements such as the floors, my celebrant, the face, or the floor. So if you use this option, you will be able to select the floors. Hello, easier in any of the bits of the project. And a cyclic Center, you can make sure that you're selecting the right element or updating your project by hovering the element with the cursor. As well. You can disable or enable this option at any point while creating your project. So with this in mind, you will have a different way in order to select the floors. Then also you're going to see the sensory grading an element by using spirometry, you're going to be able to create floors on other views of the project. However, if you are not able to edit the floor when a particular piece of the project you are going to be able to see that opens a window that is going to be, and this window will allow you to open any of the abuse and which are able to enter the floors, which is going to include that 3D view. So you can always use a 3D view in order to adding all the elements of your project. But also you will be able to sell at a particular view, you may already be using hardworking your project. So all this means same grading and editing the floors. It's actually crazy because you're still using pretty much the same tools or commands that you use for many of the other family systems they have in revenue. Which also means that many of these options are going to be available in other families systems 38. Floor Properties: On this part of the course, I want to show you how can you let Properties or the floor. So in order to do this, I'm going to create a cobalt Floors and this project in order to show you the different changes that you can do on the Projects. And as well, I'm going to greater Floors, taking into account your B over the floor by using different Views, which means that the Floors are perceived differently when The View cuts the Floor point. In other words, when you're looking at a Floor, placing a section view, I'm going to make sure that one of the Boundaries grows through this section of this template. Only other one doesn't. And after creating Boulder the Floors, I'm just going to open this section in order to start showing you how you can change the properties of the floor. Starting first by changing the family tie the floor. So I'm going to change this family time before changing the detail level. And as you can notice, changing the detail level will allow you to see all the layers that make the floor. So what this means is that the Floors will also have layers just as the Walls. So the Floors as a Family System or by different from the Walls. But they also have a lot of similarities. Which also means that you can change the distance Properties Floors independently one from the other. This instance properties are going to include that level in which the floor is being placed, as well as a property that is score high upset. Now something for you to know what the Levels he said, the Levels that you can choose out of the same Levels, the gray base and the level two or domain. And as well as you can notice, the high upset use SSL referenced those levels, which means that the Floors or Host by the Levels or less the same time, you can use negative values as well as positive values. And as I mentioned before, when you use Fine as the detailed level, they're able to see the layers that make the floor. And this is pickers. The floor also uses Layers, which means that you feel open. Type Properties window, you will be able to find once again, the parameter that is calling structure. So in order to edit the structure, use native like Rey says they did. And once they look like resuscitate, it will be able to write it this structure, the floor by using the edit assembly window almost as you can do it with the Walls. Which also means that you will be able to save information of the floor, but also up and the premium. You're going to see, the options that you have with a Layers of the Floor are pretty much the same options. They have other layer, so the Walls, which means that if you want to earlier, you will need to click where it says insert. And this will layer on a default position are based on the layer that you select that before you select voice I see insert. And as well, you will be able to delete a layer that you selected, but also size. You can now insert layer when I pulsation of your choosing, you will have the option for product down in case that the new layer once in place and the position that you are in case they want to add a preposition or the layers, which also means that you will be able to use the same functions, but you have on the Walls as well, since you can use the preview, they're going to see that you will be able to use the premium that same way. Which means that the previous standard for other family systems and which you can use the added assembly window where they send mind. You can use this thing well, as well as the Navigation Panel. And once they've finished editing the structure of the Floors, just need to click Okay, in this window in order to blossom as well by this point, since we have covered the Walls and now the Floors, we are going to be able to see that the Walls and the Floors have a function. And this function will allow you to change if you want to use the Walls and the Floors for the interior part of the exterior. Now this might not seem very important at first when you're creating a project with a lot of Floors and Walls on different areas or parts of the project, you might need a different way, interrupter separate elements. So this means that the function is going to be very useful when you're quantifying how many floors and walls have you creating your projects. In order to know which of these elements are placed on the exterior of the project and which ones are placed on the interior of the project. And I will follow this means say, they're going to be able to use the type Properties window in order to see there Family System there is being used as well as the family. Which also means that you can change their family pi by Senator Properties window. And as well, if you want to avoid editing an existing family type, you can create any informally time when the option that is called duplicate. And as you can notice, when you select racist duplicate, you can select the name of the new family type, but also you will be able to rename their family time after you already grading. Once again, the reason why you went to create independent Family Types so that you can add a new family type without editing and other family. So this will allow you to create variations of the safe holiday, but also based will allow you to save a lot of time in cases in which the floor is going to be pretty much the same except for the finished. So antibodies that I can give you. Instead you create an a standard floor or the entire project and then just add to that I standard floor painted if the change to finish or the thickness of some of the layers. And this advice also applies when you're creating a structure Floors. Because even the structure of Floors can use a finished depending on the area in which you're using them. Especially when most of the Floors of your project needs to be a switcher Floors because of the use of the Project. Part of a location in which our placing the Project 39. The Span Direction: When creating a Floor in Revit, you might have noticed that there is a line on the boundary. There is different than the other ones. So if I create a Floor on this project, you are going to see once again, let tools on the Draw Panel, but also the boundary lines after creating the boundary of the floor. How are you going to say, regardless of the number of boundary lines, there is only one line that is different from the others. And this one is used to represent the Span Direction. Now the Span Direction is sexually what determines the direction which are going to create the Floors. And this is the reason why you only need one of these lines. Now this one can be graded based on the next System line within the boundary. But also you can create the Span Direction independently from the boundary. Now the reason why you can do this is because in some cases, you might need this direction a bit different from the shape of the floor. And because of these are going to be able to change the position of the line, but also you will be able to use this controls in order to Change the rent patient with a line. Which also means that you can use some other tools on the Modify tab in order to add a baseline as well. Since they're able to create the Span Direction independently from the boundary, we're going to be able to turn one of the lines to make the boundary ain't to the Span Direction. So this means that you're going to use PICC lines in order to select one of the boundary lines. Going. In other words, you can turn our boundary line into this pond Direction. Now the Importance of the Span Direction is not actually an architecture because in Architecture for the most part, you won't be creating a Floor that requires the Span Direction because it's not an a structural floor signed Revit structure Floors, Part of the ones that I created in a way, they use this the Span Direction, not only because of the design of the floor, but also because of the structure, the sign of the Project. This is something that you can notice because your structure floor is created with an annotation that the Architecture Floors doesn't have. The Span Direction is actually pretty useful. However, if you are going to be ascend Revit on Architecture projects, you might never get to see how the Span Direction affects the structure of the Projects. 40. Using the Floors as a Host: When other reasons why the Floors are important is because in Revit based Family System can be used as Host, which means that this can be such reference in order to place are the elements, but also some other components you can placing your project will recognize the floor as a Host. Which is the same thing that happens when you place a door on a wall. If I place these components on the floor, we're going to see that the floor is going to appear highlighted. And if this happens, the floor is going to be use as the host. Four components such as this one, which is something that you can verify after placing the components by just simply select them. The components are my specifically by looking at the properties of the component. And as well centered for you to know is the way you create a component. You will need to specify if it's going to use a Host ordinate and if he's going to use a Host, which hose is going to use. Now this case I'm just going to focus on how these tiger components while Lakes to the floor. So I'm just going to select the floor in a rapid change. They upset. And once I have done this, we're going to see components will actually move along with the floor. So this is going to be very useful in cases in which we're changing the placement of floor by either using the properties are based on the Levels. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to create another floor on this project that I can actually use as a Host for one of these components. And says the Florida is already on the project issues and they upset I wanted to change the placement of the floor by essential properties, which means that I'm going to create a simple boundary and then select the green check to finish the floor. So why is it greater this floor? And just going to select this component. And then I going to go to the Modify tab in order to use big new Host under Host Panel. Now once they are use this option, you are going to see that I'm going to be able to select the other floor as a Host and 1 s. And you're going to notice that this component is you send a Floor as a Host as well. You're going to be able to see the basic information of the host. In other words, the basic information of the floor. Once again, this is going to be by Use won't because you won't have to change the placement of the component after changing the placement of the floor. Or in another words, the placement of floor is going to determine population or the component. And because of this, this component doesn't have a property that allows you to create an upset from the floor. So I see nowadays the Floors Harlan more useful, but then appear to be 41. The Slope Arrow: When editing or creating the Floors for your project, you might have wondered, how are you getting greater floor with the Slope? Send this lesson. What I went to show you is how you can enter slow. So the Floors where there is when you're creating the floor or when you're editing the floor is going to create a Floor on this floor plan before editing the Florida, but I just created he needed to add a Slope. So if I click away says Edit Boundary and just going to cover where he says that Slope Arrow. And as you can tell, it's the one they use in elements such as the Floors. However, it's okay. Notice this can also be used in other elements. So through adolescence you're going to say there's some elements actually have the option in order to add this low bias and this error. And once they use the Slope Arrow, you are going to notice that you have access to a few tools of the Draw Panel. So this means they are able to draw the Slope Arrow like you were drawing a line. And because of this, you are going to see the ones who created the error. You will have controls that you can use in order to extend the error. This means that you can control the error after you create it. Now the change is greater, but the Slope Arrow might not be very apparent at first. However, if we use a BU head, which you can see my higher-order floor, there will be able to appreciate the change. And as well, something for you to know is that it's Change is going to be personally also depending on the B they are use in, the value is large enough, they're going to be able to see this change a lot better on the 3D view. Because you won't be able to see the relationship between this element and other elements may place on your projects a little bit better. There's some other views you might be using. Now the Slope Arrow actually functions based at the beginning and the NOP ever, which means they're able to select what are the Slope is going to a star, but also worthy Slope is going to end. Now this is going to work very similar to the Walls. How are by default, the placement of this error is actually based on the floor. So you don't need to change the level of tail and the level of head. So in order to make this change more apparent and going to increase the value, upset at detail. Once I have done this, we're going to see maybe if I click on Finish, the floor is going to change based on these values. Hey, if there is any confusion with the properties, or more specifically, which property affects which part of the Slope. You can notice that this Properties go from the end of the arrow to the beginning point. In other words, these properties affect the Slope Arrow based on how you draw the arrow. Now since I'm changing the value of the upset, you are going to see that depending on the duration of the error, baseload is going to change. So it's very important for you to know how the placement we're going to affect a Floor. Now, as I mentioned before, if you don't want to use on a specific value, you can simply use the Levels as a reference. Which means that you can use our grade levels in order to add a Slope Arrow. Now PSICQUIC sign-on, something that you're going to notice throughout the course is that the Slope Arrow as an option that is going to appear. Elements which are neither greater boundary like on the Floors. And what it's been said, something even more important for you to know about the place. Now the error is that the heroin that's not actually need to be placed from one N to the other. Which means that you can change the extent of the error, may not have to change this flow of an element such as this one. You can actually change the extent of the year then Panel, what do you want to do? Which is something that you can do a little bit easier medicine for example, the Automatic Dimensions has a quick sign. The Slope Arrow also uses the Snaps. So you can use elements or objects as a reference when ATP, not only the position of the Slope Arrow, but also its extension An important for you to nowadays, instead, the Slope Arrow doesn't actually have to become find for the boundary of the Floor. Which means that you can move the Slope Arrow outside of the parameter of the floor. So even if replace this era outside of the boundary of the floor, you are going to see that the Slope Arrow still going to change the slope of the Floor. Which also means that you can even change the angle of the Slope Arrow. So as you can notice, you can use this look. However, in order to make a few changes on the floor, append-only, you say you wanted to have our main revenue. Suddenly you will notice is that even though you can actually use this in order to create ramps, you don't actually need to. Because Revit actually has two argument that you can use in order to create rooms. So you might only need to do this point, creating a specific elements or parts of your projects as well. You can notice that parallel floor will not be possible on this colombia. Mainly speaker, so the plane of the beer. So in the course, I will cover how you can change the color plane on Views such as this one as well. Something for you to notice is that you can actually change how the Slope Arrow is going to change the slope of the Floor. Which means that you can go to the properties in order to Change the option that is called specified. And if you do is we're going to be able to change from high to a slope. However, you are going to notice that now the value is going to be based on the property that is called Slope has another quick sign. You can see that we'll use this little arrow this way. Then level at tail and the height upset tail are grayed out. Point, in other words, base properties that are disabled. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I going to change the slope and then I going to change any additional values to zero. And I've to click and then the green check, you are going to be able to see how this value is going to Change the floor. But also you're going to notice, and then now you're able to Change the slow pace and the properties of the floor. So the Slope Arrow now allows you to control the Slope of the floor where they actually written the floor. But also you are going to be able to nowadays. But you can also that determine which level you want to use the tail of the Slope Arrow. Now this may seem confusing at first because if either this, it will be adding an upside to the Floor which is sending that you can notice because they upset, is grayed out on the properties of the floor. Or in another words, it won't be able to change this value if you assign a level for the property that is score level of tail. Also have to keep in mind how they use these properties because they are going to affect the properties of the floor. Once again, you're always going to be able to change the placement of the server regardless of how you're using the Slope Arrow. So all of those means say, you are going to see that the Slope Arrow is actually pretty useful and adding NSLog to the Floors. But more importantly, you're also going to be able to see there are elements that will make use of the Slope Arrow 42. Placing a Roof: On the next few lessons, I'm going to cover another Family System. And this Family System is going to be the Roof, net the Roof as such, and actually be grading in a few different ways. So the first thing that I'm going to cover is how you place the Roof by using Roof I footprint. And this is because liberal fight footprint is the one that you'll be using the most. Because this one is actually very similar to place and the Floors. And once that I said like the Roof by footprint, the first thing that you're going to notice instead Revit is going to ask you in which level you want to place the Roof. Which is actually very useful because in many cases, you will be actually using a Floor Plan, your projects and several reference point grade in the Roof. So you won't have to worry of our grading appeal just for the Roof fundamental level in which you want to place the Roof. Few things for you to notice of our gradient, the Roof is that the Roof Paralympic rating unplanned Views. And as well, you are going to see that the Roof requires a boundary. So just like the floor Revit is going to ask you to create a boundary face and the tools we can find in the Draw Panel of the Modify grapefruit footprint app. That's a quick center lines they use in a retrograde the Boundaries Roof. Also consider boundary lines. However, in this case, you are going to notice that the boundary lines are a little bit different. And this is because this boundary lines are used to determine the slope at the Roof. The lines to make the boundary need to be chained together are Revit will not be able to create the Roof. And as a quick signer, Revit is going to display an error message if it is not able to create a Roof. Which also means that if you have any issues with the boundary, we can also edit the boundary is another tools that you have in Revit, such as this one. Once we've finished editing the boundary, you can click on the green, check an adequate validated Change. Now once the Roof explaination, you can look at the Russell on a blend View, but also night 3D view. Another Roof I such Mississippi perceive when they 3D view because it won't be caught by the B range that is assigned to that we say you weren't going to be able to see. I've never actually looks like NASW. Another similarity between the Roof and the Floors is that the Roofs and also take into account that Layers of the Walls. So in order to show you this a little bit better and grow into gray whilst on this project, they can be used when editing the boundary of the Roof and why creating this Walls. And also going to be using the options and the Options bar in order to avoid any confusion when it comes to the appearance of the project. But also in order to make sure that they are exact values on this project. Especially pickers, exact values will make things less confusing when it comes to the result of editing the Roof. Because it is also going to Change the Family Types of this wall to Family Types. They uses more than two layers. Once I finished, yet also going to see where you can edit the Roof by selecting the Roof and then selecting where it says Edit footprint. When editing the Roof, I going to go to the Draw Panel once again in order to show you how you can use the layer so the Wall in order to either the boundary of the Roof. Specifically, I going to be using the option Briscoe big Walls and pick Walls. It's going to have the same option that is called extend to walk or in order to organize my layers of the wall. So to make sure they are able to see all the layers, you can use the detailed level as Fine, but also the, you can use thin lines in case they are not able to see all the lines that make the wall. So I'm just going through the boundary based on the Walls. And then I go into click on the green check. Go into the Boundaries based on the Walls, and then I go into click on the coin check. Once that I click on the green check, you're going to see that the Roof and also be used to attach the Walls, which is standard that you can only do if you create or edit the Roof after placing the Walls. However, the attachment is going to remain the same, which means that the Walls will attach with a Roof if they can connect with a Roof. However, since you can attach to the road with a editing the boundary of the Roof, you can also use the option that is go to an attach after great and the Roof. All of these mean saying creating a Roof by footprint is actually bracing. Especially when you take into account how similar this is a Floor 43. Editing the Roofs: Once you've created the Roof, you're going to be able to change properties, such as, for example, the Family Types. So if you use the Properties, you can use the type selector in order to Change the Family Types of the Roof. And depending on the family time, you are going to see a change on the appearance of the Roof because of the materials. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to Change the detailed level, but also the visual style of the beam. So with this, we're going to notice other family time will change, also the appearance of the Roof. And this is also very important because their parents have the Roof is the one that is used for the Renders. Wherever you create you Renders, we then review or by using another software. Now since you can use the properties in electric Change the family type, you can also use the price of these properties and attractive either the position of bias and the constraints, which means that you can assign a base level to the Roof. But also you can decide the base subset from level. Or in another words, the upset whenever often is going to have from the level that you assign as the base level and as a quick center, you're going to see where you can use positive values and negative values, which means they don't have the gray level for the base level of the Roof. And as well so unafraid nowadays is that there is a property that the school level now the cutoff level issues to where if the Roof. So because of this, you can use the Levels as a reference. However, what you're actually using this, the height of a level. This means that you can not use any level that is below the height of the Roof, which is also going to include any level that is satisfying height of the Roof. And the reason for the base is because the current level actually cost the Roof. So if you want to use, for example, let's say level in which you place the row. You actually need to change the base opposite from level in order to change the height of the Roof. If you change the height of the Roof, we're going to see that now the current level, sexually current the Roof. However, if you don't want to change my height or febrile, you can also change a partly Briscoe, the car of upset. So the upset, but actually the valid data type on the properties to the current level, which is standing there. You're gonna appreciate a little bit better if you change the height of the Walls based on the height of the wolf, or just by using attach the base. However, if you use attach the base and this row, you are going to notice that this doesn't actually change the appearance of the Roof because the Walls will not be able to connect with this Roof. Connect to this Roof. And if this is the case and you project, you're also going to see everybody is going to display an error message. And also it will give you the option in order to detach the targets, which is sexually very useful in some projects because you don't actually have to add the boundary of the Roof. An editor gray, something like this 44. Changing the Slope on the Roof: When creating your projects and rarely, you might have noticed that almost all the elements that you can create for your project by independence systems are Family Types Database and as family systems. And this is because those family systems actually has functionality, the penalty element decorating, same the case of the Roofs. The main functionality of the Roofs are the slopes. So what this means is that you can select a Roof in order to Change the Slope just by using the properties, which is Section in a very useful because you can design the Slope on the Roof by just changing one of the values. However, you will need to know whether this value actually comes from, because depending on your country or region, the slopes might be created differently. So in this case, I'm going to use that'd be built lines in order to show you a little bit better the Slope on the Roof by using a sub reference 1 m, which in this case is going to be at thousand millimeter. So I'm going to create a line of 1 m. And then I going to use, and some of my friends, I know that the grader line that is used to determine the slope of the Roof. And after doing this, you're going through notice a couple of things. One of them, so you're going to use the base of the Roof as a reference for the Slope. And another one is that this value does not actually reflect all the different values that you can use. This the Slope. One of the things that you can do in order to see this Slope of the Roof a little bit better, asexually Change the project Units. And this is because the project Units will allow you to change the value of this Slope on the proper phase depending on the different values that you can use in your country region. You're going to use, for example, the rice, which is pretty much what I was using. How long this case it's going through to automatically. So you won't have to create a line in Revit verify the balloon. However, you do have to keep in mind bayonets they are using because in this case, because in this case, I know you sent meters or feet. So in this case and deciding how much they're Slope is going to be every thousand millimeters. Science you can change the values that you can see on this low bias and the project Units. They're going to be able to search for the units they want to use. Which is also going to allow you to verify that the Slope in rabin, it's actually based on the rise because as you notice that badly needed in order to gray the Slope didn't actually change based on the value of the rice. So if we want to use 30%, you will need to use 300 millimeter for the rice, which is the equivalent of 30 cm every meter. And if you use this load, that value is going to be also 30 45. Creating Complex Roofs: When you create a Roof, you send rabbit for the first time. You might have asked yourself how the Roof is greater with a slope. And this is because the boundary lines, so the boundary lines they use in order to create the Roof are a little bit different than the boundary lines. So the floor. And this is because this boundary lines already have enabled an option in the Options bar that allows them to create a slope. So when you added the boundary of the rule, you are going to see, but the Roof is going to change not only based on their drawing of the boundary, but also based on the Slope. And when it comes to the slopes, you are going to be able to Change the Slope based on the properties, but also you will be able to Change the Slope of individual boundary lines. What editing the boundary with the Roof. Which means that if you add the boundary of the floor by selecting the floor and then click away says at the boundary, or by using control C, you are going to be able to notice that there is a control for every boundary line. So you're going to be able to edit this Slope on each of the boundary lines by selecting the boundary line. However, sending as well for you to notice is that there is an option, the Options bar, that will allow you to remove the boundary of the Slope. And this one is called, they find the slope. So if you uncheck this option on the Options bar, you are going to see the ones that you click on Finish. Roof is going to change based on the Boundaries that they find the slope. So you're going to be able to use this painter to change their parents. So the Roof based under the sign of your Project, which does send me where you can edit the Roof even more by select on the Roof once again, thank ligand, where he says, I think boundary, which also means that you can use Control C in order to undo the changes. So after using Control-C and just go into either the Boundaries in a Roof to add a little bit more complexity to this roof. So he sees able to appreciate how these slopes actually changed the Roof. And as well, this is the one thing that you can use in a rapid change, the style of the rule. Hello easier because weather is, we're going to be able to see where you can edit this tau, the proof by just simply unchecking or checking this option. However, as I mentioned before, you can edit the Slope of the roof of the individual boundary lines by editing the boundary of the Roof. So I'm going through the boundary of this Roof once again in order to show you how you can do this. I starting first by the fact that you can change the Boundaries only on the lines may have enabled the option Mary score that find the slope. So you need to make sure that you're selecting only the boundary lines in which you can change the Slope before you send the Properties. As far as something for you to notice about this Roof instead of Boundaries are to remain connected even though it appears like the worst separated one from the other. And this is because when Shape with this handle a little bit different to other family systems you're going to use in Revit. And as well, the boundary lines will also have a control and it will allow you to do the same thing as long as you're selecting one line at a time, somebody sent mine, you will be able to have different slopes on individual boundary lines, which is going to allow you to create different size product group. Or you can simply use the same value they were using before. And if he is the same value, all the boundary lines, you can still change the Slope by select and the Roof. However, if you change the Slope on one of the boundary lines, you're going to see that not only my parents have the Roof is going to change, but also he won't be able to change the slope of the Roof. Why isn't the proper place? So you will need to get this in mind when editing the Slope that is being used for Great Basin, the values that you're assigned to this loaves of the boundary lines regardless of the result. So you can actually test in different values. So all of these veins set, you are growing the same. You can actually add a number of different ways. And some of them are going to allow for greater roof and it will take a lot of time. And some of them will allow you to test my friend proofs for you to the signs so you can silica way or another Roof based on the changes on the Project 46. Roof by Extrusion: In this lesson, I'm going to show you what is called roof by Extrusion. Now roof by Extrusion is a different way in which again create a Roof. So in order to show you this, I will need to create first elements that can be used as a reference or a Host for this Roof. And this is because this row is actually created from Views such as the elevations are the sections after creating the following Walls and also going to open one of the elevations. And once that I have done this and just going to go to the bill Panel in order to use this dropdown, drop them. You're going to see that roof by footprint and other tools or commands. So just the roof by Extrusion. Now the roof by Extrusion as such, he said two or commands that allows you to create a Roof based on a Profile. However, as I mentioned before, the roof by footprint also requires a reference or a Host. Once they select these two or commands, you're going to see that we're pulling window. And on the word pooling window where one leaf is, select the reference that you want to use an editor create this roof. And it's going to reference that you're using. It's not based upon the View, then rabbit is going to open the goal to be window. And as you remember on this window, you will be able to select them and abuse in which you can see the reference that you're using. When J is going to include the reference that you're using, whether it's an elevation or a 3D view. And in this case, I go into select a reference. There is sexually permissible within this P. And once they have done this and just go into click on Okay. In order for you to see the window that allows you to determine the placement of the Roof. Which means that this window is going to allow you to select the reference level there is use one of the same time and will allow you to select an upset from that level, as well as the optional value of the upset Plan this case. We're also going to show you what is going to happen. If you actually select as a reference, when are the elements they already have on the project? In this case, I'm going to select phase. So this wall and one said I haven't done this. They're going to see once again the row reference level and upset window. And as well, I'm going to look the police as they are. An advocate, that simple. So once I click on Okay, on this window, you're going to notice a few things. One of them is the level is going to have a different appearance. And the other one is able to use once again, the tools or commands and the Draw Panel in a literature or the Profile. And we'll drawing the profile. You're also going to see, we're going to be able to use the tools or commands and the Modify Panel in order to either the profit. And the reason why you need is to circumstance is because these Profile is created by one or multiple lines that are chained together. Which means that Revit percent need you to create the layers that make the Roof. So once they have the proffer, just native-like on the green check in order to finish the Roof based on the family type is selected. In a way something that you will notice is that these two are CMNH actually allows you to determine the shape of the road with any of the Family Types. You can save a lot of time where the roof by Extrusion because you don't have to draw or Greg, their family type based on nutrition. And what this also means, it's the ones that you can read it, the Roof, you are going to be able to use many of the same Properties you have, whether roof by footprint. So you are going to be able to Change the upset from the level non-cyclic Sina. While this Roof is selected, you're going to see that the host, so the Roof is going to appear on the Properties right next to where it says work plane. With this being said, you can create multiple groups based on the same reference for host. So in this case, I go into greater and other Roof, however, can go into make a few changes. Not on the host part of the reference, but under window that is co, reference level and upset. So you can see if there's any difference. So I'm going to change the level that is being used, but also the upset. And I going to use picket lines in order to select the existing roof. And why is that? I click on the green check. We're going to say that the row stays pretty much the same. And this is because roof by Extrusion actually creates the Roof based on how you draw the profile. So when it's actually changing how to put values on the Properties, this means that the absurd is the same thing as the little upset. And also that the reference level is the same one. So if we wanted to make sure that you're using the reference level and the way that is supposed to be, you will need to make sure that you're drawing Profile the Roof based on the level that you selected for. In another words, based on the level that appears on this color. And therefore you didn't notice instead of thickness of the Roof is actually created below the Profile. When using roof by Extrusion, you will need to take into account that thickness of the Roof when drawing the profile. And as a quick center, just have to select a row and then select Race says Edit Profile. And as well, the placement of the rule is also important because you can use attach the base in order to attach the wall. So be Project whoever created by using an Extrusion, which means that the Walls are going to connect the base of the Roof as well. So the important for it, no. How about the roof by Extrusion is how the roof by Extrusion actually uses a Properties cyanotic to show you this a little bit better. I'm going to open the 3D view. And once I open the 3D view, we are going to see how the Roof actually looks like, but also have this Properties modify the appearance of the Roof. So besides the reference level and D upset, you also need to take into account Extrusion star and the Extrusion. And now these two values are going to take into account number I, friends, or close. Which means that the positive values by default going to be towards the K-mer based on the beam in which you created the Roof. Well-done negative values are going to be on the opposite direction. Now this is also going to take into account the visual style because that's where remember, you can use wireframe. So when you use wireframe, you aren't going to be able to select elements there are behind other elements. In this case, we're going to say that this will quite footprint use as positive values towards the outside and negative values on the opposite direction. Now as well, you're going to see that even though you send a reference for a Host, you can still change extension the roof by Extrusion away from the reference for Host by using this controls. Which also means they don't actually have to use the properties of the Roof. Interethnic change, this star and the end of the Extrusion. So you can use this controls how this star and at the end of the Roof, but also the Automatic Dimensions once you start using this controls. So you will be able to change the length of the Extrusion by changing the value and the blue numbers. So you will be able to use the controls that Properties or the Automatic Dimensions depend on the Roof peer grading, as well as unimportant for it. And now you can use the tools or commands having a Modify Panel. So you're going to be able to use those or commands such as this one in the Roofs sense, you can use this to recommend in order to edit this row. You're also going to be able to lock the position of this Roof based on the other one. Which means they are going to be able to add one of the Roof based on the other one. And as well, they're going to say that there is a control medicines and I've referenced for host. So if you wanted to remove this row from the Host, just need to select this control. So all of these means roof by Extrusion, sexual precis to use. Once you get used to it, however, you will have to take into account when Family Types that you want to use. Because that family type will determine the structure of the Roof 47. Using Multiple Views: In this lesson, I want to show you a few things that you can do with the peers, because by this point, you will be able to gray the basic elements they are going to need in order create a project. So because of this, you might need to use different views while editing the elements that you already placed on your project. So I'm going to go to the View tab in order to show you the Windows Panel, or more specifically, the tools or commands that you can use in order to organize the Views and the interface. So I'm going to start by using that tool, Briscoe tau abuse. This one has a shortcut which is WSM water NPA centimeter. Now this tool allows you to arrange all the opening Views within the application window. More specifically, will allow you to organize all the windows they are use and to be your projects. So before using this tool, you will need to know which other BST want to see as well. You're going to notice that the active PO is going to change depending on which one you are selecting with the mouse brain. In other words, they act like one will be the one in which you actually use the mouse. The mouse is the one that allows you to determine which one is sexually active as well, since you don't need to see everything all the abuse at the same time. Also able to Change the extent of abuse as well. You can also occur fused together within another beer. So you will be able to change their Debbie as you normally would when you have multiple tabs. Which means they will need to change that by also using the mouse. And as well, you're going to notice that every newbie that you open, he's going to be active within the active view. So you're going to see multiple tabs within a beer. Now even though this is going to be very useful, I'm working on your projects. You also need to take into account how much resources this is going to use. So you will need to keep in mind that this is going to ask more resources out of your computer. Now as well. Something for you to notice is the ones therapy has been open, you won't be able to open it once again on another buildup, you're only going to turn. A builder is already open to an active. Since we are able to open the Views at once. Also going to be able to compare to the Views hint abuse once again by you send it to vary score therapies, which is the same thing that you can do by using the shortcut, which is teosinte mater and WSSE Water. Once they use this, you are going to see better beer there was active, will remain active while the other ones are going to become diabetes. So you will be able to use this Options at any point in order to open or collapse or the Views and as well. So in fact nowadays it's the Regardless of the way in which you organize the Views, these are going to function pretty much the same. Which is something that you can notice because you can still close HOW is independently, even if they are not grew on another peers as View perhaps. Which also means that you can use the same drop-down on the abuse to cycle through the abuse, but also in order to close any abuse. However, placing, etcetera, then there is still useful when you have Multiple Views. Group together, has type Use, say that actually need to use this drop-down when you only have one single beer. And as a quick signer, you can still notice which project is open with each of these Views. So you're going to see that you can organize the Views homeless anyway, the one, hello, This means said you can actually close the Views as you normally would when you send disrupt them. Now, so quick center, you don't actually have to snap to another beer. Which means that if you're using multiple monitors, you can actually present, Drag one of the abuse to another monitor, or just living independently from the rest of the user interface as well. You're going to find that this is actually useful because you can actually open multiple projects at the same time. Which means that you can use this interrupt to compare different versions for backups. So the same project as well. You can use the Windows Panel in order to cluster Views has been normally would by clicking on the eggs are based on the drop-down, something as well for you to know as they are also able to switch the Windows based on the Windows Panel, which is the same thing that you can do by using Control plus tap on the keyboard. So you will be able to use Control plus typing the keyword. Or you can simply go to the Windows Panel in order to switch the window, paste and disrupt them. However, since you already have another drop-down that allows you to do this, you're going to say that you have different alternatives in order to do the same. Mainly because that changes the you can do to the user interface. So all of this being said, I hope they are able to add a little bit easier the elements that you create on your projects 48. The Ceiling Plan: On the next few lessons ago I took over the Ceilings. So because of this, I wanted to show you how you can open inquiry has Ceiling Plan. And this is because the Ceiling Plan is the one they use in order to per cent per Ceilings of your project. Now this doesn't mean that you can create elements as you normally would by their use in real abuse. However, they Ceiling Plan is already greater for you to see only elements on the upward direction. Or in another words, it allows you to see a project like you weren't looking at. So if you're create elements such as the Floors, you're going to notice that you can still see them when I Plan B, but you won't be able to see them on a Ceiling Plan. The plan view is going to look at the elements from the top, while the Ceiling Plan is going to look at the elements from the bottom. Now this might be confusing at first. So if you already have greater projects before, you are going to notice that both of these periods, are you somebody Sheets. So one of them, it's not actually more important than the other hand, as well as under for you to know is that the Ceiling Plan arcuated based on the Levels, the plant Views and the Ceiling Plan. I create a base and a level. Which also means that if you wanted to create a Ceiling Plan, they might have deleted that is missing on the Projects. To just have to go to the View tab and then just simply open this menu so you can select where it says reflected Ceiling Plan. Some of these, you won't be able to gray blend beer present and therefore the Ceilings, somebody's window you're going to see. And then Levels actually have a Ceiling Plan, as well as the option of various go to duplicate cylinders, which is going to make sure that you're only able to see the Levels have done already have Ceiling blend. This case I'm just going to click on Okay. In order for you to see now the Ceiling Plan has been created for the level as well. Something very important for you to know is that the difference between these views are based on different properties that you can change on the plan views, including the one that is called the Arrange. Sorry, also going to cover the B range in order for you to see how the Ceiling plans can change, what kind of how you want to show your projects. But also in order for you to say right Revit displays the Views please play. However, if you already have experience with projects that require the Ceiling Plan, other views. But you may already know about the couplings and the default values that are use in order to display elements on the floor plans, comparator, the Ceiling place. So what this means said, I wanted to show you how you can create and edit the Ceilings, but also how you can open gray and the abuse. Because by this point, you might have noticed that the projects are going to have a lot of different family systems that you can place, which can make the projects are a little bit confusing. If you don't know which previously you need to use that also, if you don't know how to add it when you want to CMU's, such as the Floor Plans and the Ceiling Plan? 49. Placing a Ceiling: Now when grading a project in Revit, you may need to create a Ceiling. At some point. In Revit, you're able to greatest Ceiling by using the Architecture tab. And I'm the Architecture tab. We're going to find the Ceiling to our command. Now this one will allow you to create a Ceiling within an area of your projects. Now this area will need boundaries. The boundaries can be the Walls or they can be based on this sketch that you can Great Basin the joint tools. So after using the cylinder or commands, you will have the option to create an automatic Ceiling better also, you can sketch the Ceiling. In this case, if you use the Automatic Ceiling, they are going to notice that this is the default option that really provides. So by using the Automatic Ceiling, we just need to hover the area in which you want to grade the Ceiling, which in this case is going to be defined by the Walls. They are already graded. And after you have done this, we're going to see that there is a message around this. Be able to see the Ceiling. However, if we go to the elevation and then I changed the View style to wireframe, we are going to be able to see what are the Ceiling is. But also you will be able to select the Ceiling. So you can click recess edit boundary in order to edit the boundary, the Ceiling, and ask if you add at the boundary of the floor on a particular bill in which are able to see the Ceiling. Revit will just simply allow you to edit the boundary on that same view. However, if you use at the boundary on a View, let us and allow you to see the Ceiling or the boundary where the Ceiling, such as the south elevation Revit open the go-to be window in order to show you that the using which are able to edit a Ceiling. Once you select one of these Views, just need to click on Open View in order to open the beam. And then you can edit the Ceiling as you normally would. Now the Automatic Ceiling will actually need a boundary or an area that you can use in order to place the Ceiling. This one is going to be provided by the Walls. Hey, most of the cases. And if you'd assign the structure of your projects also, the structure is going to be able to provide the boundary for the Ceiling. However, if you select one of the Walls, we are going to notice that there is an option for the boundary which is cool room bounding. Now this option or property on the Properties palette is going to show interfere elements that you can create in Revit. And one of these elements is the wall. So if you uncheck this option, you are going to notice that if you use an automatic Ceiling, you will not be able to place the Ceiling. And this is because the Walls are no longer defined in a room, meaning that the Ceiling is not able to recognize an area in which can be placed because one of the Walls, even though it's there, it will appear as a wall mechanics says, but maybe it's just for the curation. So this is something for you to keep in mind when working with rooms and with Ceilings. In as a quick signer, if you have any issues, even when placing an aromatic Ceiling without changing this parameter or property on the Properties palette, which is by default check most likely the issue will come based on the height of the Ceiling. You will also need to keep in mind that the height of the Ceiling also defines if there are Walls that can create, or they can define the boundary of the Ceiling. However, you can actually create an, a specific boundary for the Ceiling buy use and the Ceiling tools or commands, and then click and races and sketch Ceiling. Now this will allow you to use the drawing tools in order to draw the boundary for the Ceiling. So in this case, you can use the basic drawing tools, but you can also use Pig Walls. And after grading the boundary for the Ceiling, you just need to click on the green check in order to validate the boundary. Now when it comes to pick Walls, you are going to notice that you have a few options there, pretty much the same ones that you have one grade in the floor. So this means that you are going to have extended into wall and in parentheses two core, but also you are going to have the upset. Now when you use big Walls, you're going to notice that the Boundaries also have athlete control in order to flip the direction of the upset. Now the creation of the Ceiling, it will seem a little bit simpler after seeing the Floors, because the Floors are actually more complex than the Ceilings. However, the basics for the Ceiling are pretty much the same lines as the basics for the floor. In this case, I'm just going to create a boundary with the Ceiling, myosin thick lines. And at the same time, something for you to notice is that you are able to gray multiple Ceilings, one on top of the other. Which means that you can create Ceilings with different boundaries and different designs that can relate or they can be independent. One from the other hand, because that is also going to see that there is a View options and tools that you can use in another, create different designs for your project. However, one of the most simple things that you can do in order to combine multiple Ceilings is this Slope Arrow, which means they are going to be able to use the Slope Arrow as you will use elements such as the Floors. So in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to delete one of the Ceilings. And then I go into edit the other one. And then I just simply going to create another Ceiling in. We can go into the Slope Arrow. What do in this? We're going to say that the Slope Arrow is the same one that you have with the Floors. And this is speaking as the Slope Arrow. I said Toby, you can find when using multiple family systems. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to create complex Ceilings by just simply aren't the Slope Arrow tool one of the Ceilings. Now as well, something for you to keep in mind is lessons both of these elements migrate independently when you will need to make sure that you're using the reference for the right values and the Properties panel together. So they are looking for middle. So if you don't draw the arrow, you can also create an Slope. Arrow might just simply selecting one of the boundary lines. You have a niche of selecting the error. Please remember that you can use tab on the keyboard in order to cycle through elements that are nested together. And this will allow you to grade and a Slope Arrow based on one of the Boundaries. And as you notice, the boundary and the Slope Arrow will modify the boundary if you move them, but also there will be joined to the rest of the boundary. Now this doesn't mean that you're not able to enjoy the Slope Arrow from the boundary in order to move it independently by just simply using the controls on the Slope Arrow. Whether it's been said, you're also going to see where you're able to assign and slow 21 of the edges are boundary lines of the Ceiling. Which means that the slopes are going to function very much the same way as they function and the Floors. You're going to be able to Change the Slope by changing this value or by just simply type in the Pali mandibular numbers. Somebody is the ones that you do this by going to be able to change the slope of the Ceiling, by changing the properties of the Ceiling. The assumptions are going to be buried as white gradient the Ceilings for your projects 50. Editing the Ceilings: Now this Ceiling is very similar to the floor as well. Because while selecting the Ceiling or where the Ceiling is still selected, we are able to change the type by using the type selector, but also you're able to change the properties, placing the Properties palette. So just the level, but also the opposite front level. So this means that you can edit the Ceiling pretty much the same way they added the floor when it goes to the Properties, we haven't the Properties palette. And at the same time, we are going to be able to find under the Dimensions category this hello, the perimeter, the area, and the volume. Now I'm on the Ceiling Types that you have Arthur generic Ceiling. The compound Ceiling, which is a little bit more complex when also requires for you to Change the detailed level. We want to visualize all the details of the Ceiling, such as in this case, in which I can change the Ceiling type by using the type selector to the default Ceilings that you have with a template. And this also means that if you select the Ceiling and then you go to the Properties palette in order to open the type Properties window, we're going to be able to find the property, some parameters that make the Ceiling. So this means that you will be able to Change the family that you want to use for the Ceiling. Also, you will be able to Change the Family Types, which also determines the complexity of the Ceiling. In the case at the basic Ceiling, the only parameter that you can change the material. However, if you change the family to a compound Ceiling, you will be able to change their structure that makes the Ceiling as well. You will be able to duplicate the type, which also means that you can rename the type, whether it is the basic one or the compound Ceiling. This means that you are going to have pretty much the same options and parameters on the type Properties window. However, for the compound Ceiling, if you go to the structure with the Ceiling and you click on Edit, you are going to find pretty much the same assembly window that you find, whether they will send the Floors. And at the same time, if you want to visualize the Ceiling, you just need to use the preview, which will allow you to select the view that you want to use as well. You can use the steering wheel and assuming Options. And as with the assembly Windows, four elements, so just the Floors and the Walls. You are going to be able to insert layer as well. You will be able to organize the layers by using up and down, which also means that you can delete the layer. However, for this Ceiling is actually very simple, very straightforward, as you can notice, made information that you can get. Moreau saw on the fact that on the columns you have the function, the material that thickness and the wraps. It. All of these means say they're going to say that you can edit the Ceiling based on the project they are grading. Good morning, part of family. They're going to see that there is a lot of changes that you can do. Two elements such as the Ceilings, whether actually editing the Ceilings. Because as you might have noticed throughout this license, their parents or the Ceilings has a pattern. This pattern is related to the material. So once I go to the materials, we're going to see how you can do this with the materials 51. The View Range: This lesson, I wanted to show you how to use the B range. And this is because some of the elements that you are gray, we're working, your projects can be used as a Host for other elements. So you're going to see that the elements, they use this element as a Host have a property that is cool. I still height. Now there's still high. It's a property that will appear. Many other components that you can find that the components library. And the reason why this is important is because these properties will affect this component is going to be placed. But also if he's going to be within the family, they host the element. Because as you remember, in elements such as statesman, able to control how high is going to go if an element is placed outside of the host than the element is now going to replace all of these means. So you can change, maybe arranged by using the proper base of The View. So if you go to this part of the properties, you're going to be able to click Preserve setup right next to the View Range. And once the satellite Grids, I said they're going to see that'd be Range window. Now these values and Options, my scene a little bit confusing at first. So in order to understand this pile is a little bit better. I'm just going to show you the preview. The premium will allow you to say whether be Range actually controls by looking at this case, sum these values, you are going to be able to find the primary Range stuff, the primary Range plane, the primary Range bottle. That'd be that level. The primary Range, the View tab, and the B range, as well as any for you to notice is that the B range is sexually the sum of two regions. One of them is the primary Range and the other one. And this is because the primary Range is the one that determines what you can see from the primary Range bottom all the way up to the primary Range up worldview there will determine how far you can see from the primary Range bottom. So one of these regions is intended to lead you see your projects on the floor. What they are, the one that determines how far down you're going to see from the floor. I'm going to close this window. And then I go into select this element in order to change the property that is still high. But more specifically, I'm going to change this still high, a little bit higher. Ones that I click on Apply. They're going to see that the window does no longer appear on this Plan B. And this is because now this window is actually above the plane. And this is something that can be perceived a little bit better than an elevation. In this elevation are going to make sure that you can see the same values that you can find under be arranged window, but also the most important values. But you can find them the keys which are going to be their primary Range can't blame. And the primary Range bottom, because these ones are the ones that are mainly used for Change, which you want to see on the plant Views. So with these are going to be able to see that everything that is a bar like a plane is now going to appear on these Columbia. And this also means that if you place an element below, like a plane, Revit, will not actually display the element. Is a quick sign. Are you going to see that the element remains selected even if you can see it. Which means you're going to still editing phase and the properties or the Modify panel. So what days you're going to be able to say that the elements will be possible depending on the placement that they have in your project. However, there is a few elements, such as the doors that will remain visible. On the other moment, they move them up, uptake a plane. So if you change this property, you are going to see that we can make the door disappear from this beer is I break center Heraclitus say that the default value of the plane, 1.2 m, which is standard value that is used in many countries or regions. Which means that this is a value that is not just for Robin, Nancy quick center, depending on the placement at all. You're also going the same, but the appearance of the wall is going to Change. And this happens because Revit tries to make the project as accurate as possible. So as you might have noticed by this point, like a plane is the most important value, we will have an a B range. Especially because you are going to be able to change not only how you view the family systems, where you use a New Project, but also other components that are graded by your center family systems, which also means there is going to affect elements like the moral lines and the top surfaces. With this means say, if you change the properties of elements such as the Walls, you are going to notice that their parents, so the Walls, he's going to change on the Projects. And this is because you can change not only the placement of the wall, but also the height of the Wall. So their parents or the Walls with a New Project is also going to depend on the card plane as well. You don't actually have to change the values and the View Range unless you have to hand this is because there are other options that you can use. Linearity for you to change how you view project. Because in many cases, you're going to notice they changing these values is not enough. So there are many things that you can use in order to change the appearance of the Projects, such as, for example, the visual style, but also other ones they are going to be able to find on the proper base of The View, as well as on the ribbon sign. Just going to live up to this point, may not have to keep it simple 52. Starting the Project (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this lesson, I'm going to start the project of the course. And because of this, the start of this project is going to be based on the first lessons of the project. Which means that I'm going to change the project units by using the managed step. On the managed step, I'm going to select recess project units in order to change the units that are going to be using throughout this lesson or exercise. However, you don't have to use the same units that I'm using because you can use this based on your country region. Which means that if you already know the units that you are going to be using on elements such as the walls, the floors, and the doors, you will be able to use those units instead of the ones that you use on the course And after changing the project units. I'm also going to say this project as a new file. This is because I'm going to be using this file for the rest of the project. On this window, I'm going to select the location of the project, but also going to be selecting the name and the amount of packups. After doing this, you're going to see that the name that I selected is going to appear on the user interface. After saving this project, I'm going to start placing the basic elements or references that I'm going to use in order to place the families and family systems that are going to be used on this project. Starting first with the grids, then I'm going to place the grids by using the floor plan. After using the grid to recommend, you are going to notice that you can place the grids with a lot of precision by using the automatic dimensions. But also basing the keyboard, which means that you can input the value that you want to use by using the keyboard. However, you can also place the grids by just simply using the tools that you have modified panel. You can use the copy tool in order to place more crits while using this tool recommend you are going to notice they will need the option that is called multiple in order to place multiple grits by using this tool. But also they will be able to use the constraint in order to constrain the placement of the grids. So you can use the constraint in order to avoid errors when placed on the grids. And start doing this, I'm just going to move the grids based on the center or origin of the project after changing the position of the grids. And also going to create the other grids of the project that is, of the grids are going to need a different value or name because I'm going to change the name of this grid after placing the grid. So that the grid to recommend can use this name as a reference when creating the other grids. I suppose before you to notice is that you can simply use the copy to orgament once again. However, once you already place the grids, you can simply use the automatic dimensions in order to change the position of the grids. So you don't have to decide where you're going to place the grids right away after placing the grids, I'm going to change the position of the grids based on the center or origin of the project. I'm going to keep the position of the grids as center as possible. And on this lesson, I'm going to add the next reference that I'm going to be used in this project, which is going to be the levels. So I'm going to open an elevation view in order to add a level. Because if you don't use a view such as the elevation, you won't be able to use the level to argument after making a few changes. I'm just going to use the level to argument on the Architecture tab. And once that I use this tool, I'm going to be able to create an additional level on this project. But also you're going to notice that I can place the level by using as a reference an existing level. Which also means that I can change the extension of the level but also using existing levels of reference as well. I'm going to be using the same family type, but it's used on the existing levels. Now you can verify the family type, selecting a level that is already placed as well. One of the similarities that you're going to find between the levels and the grids is that you can use the tools orguends that you have on the modified panel in order to add more levels. However, those levels will not create a W, which is the reason why the appearance of the annotation is going to be different. If you want to avoid creating the views after creating the levels, you can simply create the levels by using the level two or however, if you need to create these levels, you can simply use the tab in order to add the views that you want to create based on the level. As a quick sign, remember that you can also avoid creating the views by checking way says make plan view on the options far while using the level to Orgoen as well. You can avoid changing the family type after creating the level by just simply changing the family type is selected by Deft. Once you've read, created the levels, you are going to notice that there are different ways that you can use to change the value of the levels. You can change the height of the level using the notation, the aromatic dimensions, and the properties. While changing these values, you're going to notice that the value is actually based on the origin of the project. Which means that you can have positive values or negative values that by depo, they are always going to be absolute values. As a quick sign, you are going to notice that the alignment of these levels are going to be based on if you want to add the extension of the levels only in a specific view or not. Which is the reason why you can say that they can be used as to the levels or three levels. Especially because you can use A three B in order to at the extension of the levels. If it says three D on the text that appears on one of the ends of the levels. As well as something for you to notice with the levels in, you can use this control in order to adjust the appearance of the levels. If you have levels, they are very close together. After creating the levels that I'm going to be using on this project, I'm also going to change the name of the levels. Something for you to know about. Changing the name of the levels is that these names can be changed on a specific view or for the views at the same time. When you see this window, you will be able to change the name of the level in all the views at the same time. How something that you can notice on the template is that you have different names on the project browser and on the notation. Because of this, you won't be able to change the name on all the views at the same time. You can simply change the name of the levels by simply using the properties, and also by using a window that you can open by using the mouse, once that you hover one of these levels on the project browser. So I'm just going to change the name of the levels based on the levels that I'm going to be using through a discourse. Now the levels are easy to use because they're very similar to the grids. Even though the views in which you can play the grids are not exactly the same views in which you can play the levels. 53. Placing the Walls (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this lesson or part of the exercise, I'm going to create the walls of this project. In order to create the walls, you can simply use the wall to recommend on the build panel. And once that I use this to recommend, I'm just going to create the exterl walls of the project without changing the constraints of these walls, because they are going to reach different levels. Which is the reason why also going to edit these walls once I created them and after grading this walls and going to edit the walls, but you simply using the tools so you can find on the modified panel as walls. And therefore you to notice is that these walls are not actually placed based on a grid. Because of this, you might need to create a secondary grid just for the walls or you might need to use a different representation based on your country region. In my case, I'm going to create a secondary grid just for this wall because I will be able to hide this grid on other plan views as well. Something that you're going to notice is that you can change the representation of the grids as you can do with the levels based on how close the grids are one with the other. But also in some cases, you might be able to avoid this by just simply changing the scale. Depending on the scale you're going to be using in order to present your project, you might need to use this or which is something that is also going to apply levels. Now in this case, I'm just going to change the scale of the views based on the sheets that I'm going to create. That's a quick sign, I'm going to create a customer scale for this project because I already know the scale they are going to use on the sheets as well. I'm also going to change the properties of the wall in order to adjust the height of the walls based on the levels. Or in other words, I'm going to change the height of these walls because of the level that they are going to reach. As well as the creator notice is that not all of the walls are going to reach the same level. And this is because of the design of the roof that are going to create on the project which is sending the UK notice based on an elevation view. Before placing the other walls of the project, I'm going to create the family types that I'm going to be using this project. In order to save a little bit of time, I'm going to create an standard family type. Which means that I'm going to be creating a family type that I can duplicate in order to create other family types. A quick sign, Robert, you cannot use the function that is called structure outside of the core of the wall. Now while creating these family types, you are also going to notice that I'm not assigning the materials to the layers, even though I'm changing the function and the thickness of these layers. This is because I haven't covered the materials. However, when you already know the materials they are going to be using, you can simply add the materials in order to save even more time when creating the project. After doing this, I'm also going to change the level in order for you to see the layers of the walls. Then I'm going to assign these family types to the other ones. After doing this, I'm going to finish creating the other family types based on the one that are already created. In order to save a little bit more time, I'm going to change the wrapping before using the option that is called duplicate. Once I select where it says duplicate, I'm just going to change the values that I need to change on this family type before continuing with the other family types as well. This family type will also have different layers. This is because I want to create a family type that has a different finish on one of the sides of the wall. Because of this, I'm also going to change the layers that allows you to place the finish, such as this one. However, the finish is not going to be visible at this point because I haven't added the materials. Once I get to the materials, you are going to be able to see how this is going to look at the project. And that's a quick sign. We don't actually have to select a family type in order to create a new one. And this is because you can actually use the wall to orgaen before opening the type properties window in order to create a family type. On this part of the exercise, I'm going to once again the walls of this project. Because I'm going to change the levels that these walls are going to reach and ones that I have changed the levels that these walls are going to reach. I'm also going to use the split to recommend before changing the level that the other walls are going to reach. And because of this change, I will also need to gray a wall on the next level. Now a start doing this. I'm also going to create two additional walls on this part of the project. And once that I have done this, I'm going to change the levels that those walls are going to reach before editing. Once again the project as a quick sign, something that you're going to notice is that if you use the move to con, you will be able to disable the option that is called disjoint. You will be able to disable the option that is called disjoint in order to avoid editing the rest of the project after creating these family types. You're also going to notice that I'm going to use another family system which is going to be the wall on this project. I'm going to be creating walls by using the basic wall family system, but also by using the other family systems. You can use in order to create the walls. So I'm going to duplicate this existing family type. Once I start doing this, you are going to see, but there is a message on the user interface. Now this message has to do with the notations or additional information that you have on the walls. So I'm going to show you where this information comes from once we get to that part, of course, now once that I created this family type, I'm going to addit this structure of this family type based on the design of the project. While doing this, there is going to be a few things for you to notice. One of them is that the preview is going to show you this wall basing a section view. And on this section view, you're not going to be able to see the wrapping is actually going to change parings of the wall as well. I'm going to change the upset in order to make these two walls flat on the interior as well as the fest. This walls then actually use the center line of one of the family types, which means that you will need to use the modified tools in order to align the walls to the grids or any other references that you are using in order to place the walls as well, I'm going to create an additional family type for this part of the project. This family time is going to be pretty much the same one except for the change on this value on the words and the value of the hive on this family type is going to be different. Now, once I have done this, I'm just going to finish line on this wall, the decorates before continuing with the project we're sending that you're going to notice is that the alignment of these walls is going to change after changing the alignment on this other wall. The one thing that I'm going to do on this wall is actually use the move to orguen after selecting where it says this joint on the options for n wall for you to notice is that rabbit is going to let you know how the walls are going to relate one with the other. Now I'm just going to the interior walls of the project. Now the interior walls are going to be placed under the sign. Which also means I'm also going to consider the level in which they are going to be placed, but also how high they are going to reach. However, I'm going to place only a few other walls because I haven't created the other elements that are going to determine the design of the project as well. Something that I'm going to do is actually move this project because of the fact that this project has a lot of symmetry, which means that I can save a little bit of time on a few changes to the project. I'm going to move this project in order to use this line as a reference. If I have done this, I'm just going to make a few corrections on this project. Because of this. After placing the walls on the previous level, I'm going to place the walls of this level. Now the walls of these levels are going to be a little bit different. Because these walls are not going to extend to the same height as the exel walls. Because of this, I'm going to be changing the value of the top obst, I'm just going to create the walls of the next level. Now we're creating this walls, you are going to notice that the walls are going to be a little bit different. But also they are going to be the same on both sides. So I'm going to create the walls of this floor. And then I'm just going to select these walls before using the mirror axis in order to copy these walls on the other side. And as well, the reason why this walls are a little bit different is because this area of this Bloor plant is going to have a different use. So as you can notice that references are actually useful, especially when your project uses alutosymmetry. You will need to get the mind on the way that you design your project when selecting the tools, Recommends that you have the modified panel, and after this, I can simply save the project before continuing. 54. Placing the Floors (Exercise Using Revit 2024): And this part of the project I'm going to be creating the floors. Starting first with the floor is going to be used on this level. In order to do this, I'm going to go to the bill panel in order to select the tool that is called floor. After selecting this tool, I'm just going to be using the panel in order to create a boundary. Now with doing this, you're going to notice a couple of things. One of them is the pick walls is not able to recognize the core on a stock wall. Because of this, I'm actually going to use pick lines in order to select the boundary of this wall after creating the boundary. And also going to create the family type that I'm going to be using on this floor. Now this family type is going to be based on the fact that this floor is placed on the base of the project, which means that it's not meant to support anything else. After doing this, I'm going to create another floor that is going to be used in most of the areas of the project. After selecting the green check, I'm going to use once again the floor to recommend in order to create another floor. We're creating this floor, you're going to notice that I'm going to use the option that is called pick walls. Because in this case, pick walls will allow me to use the walls already place without having to select the layers in another walls. I will be able to use the option that is called extend to work with this walls. After selecting the boundary, I'm just going to create a new family type based on the type of this window. Now the reason why I'm creating this family type is because I'm going to duplicate this family type. And creating they are the finally that for the project to create on this family type, I'm just going to select on the green chair in order to finish with this floor. However, you're also going to see that I'm going to use this family type in order to create another floor. This floors going to take into account the symmetry that you already have at this project, but also a few changes that I'm going to do later on. So in order to do this I'm going to be using a two or on the modified panel or more specifically, I'm going to use the upset in order, the additional boundary lines for this floor. And after doing this, you are going to notice that I'm going to also use the mirror to recommend in order to create additional boundary lines. Which is even more useful when you take into account the symmetry on this project. As we I'm going to create an additional floor that is just going to cover any specific area of this project. That's a quick sign. Something that I recommend you doing is actually using the boundaries of the floor that you created as a reference for the other floors that you might create the same level, which will allow you to avoid placing the boundaries of one of the floors within the boundary of another floor. In my case, I'm going to copy this boundary before creating the next floor. That's why I agree an additional family type for this area of the project. Or in another words, I'm going to create a different floor that is going to be used on this part of the project. Which means that this floor is going to be different from the other floors at this level because of the use of this area of the project. Which means that I'm going to add this boundary based on this area. But also I will need to create an additional floor type in order to create this new floor without having to create all the layers of a new family type as well. Something that I'm going to do is actually change the placement of the section in order to show you how the project is going so far. Especially because you can start seeing that there's a few elements, we might need a correction later on because of the placement that they are going to have that the floors have been placed based on the use that they are going to have on the project or in other words, the thickness of the floors is actually different. And before creating the floors of the next level, I'm just going to make a few corrections on this section when it comes to the presentation of this section. As you may have noticed, that different floor types are going to depend on the area of the project. Throw this lessons. I'm also going to create and edit the floors based on the area that this project is going to have at the end. But also something that you may have noticed is that editing the presentation of many of these elements of the project. This is because these are corrections that are going to do, ones that I cover, how you make those corrections or changes. Now just going to create the floors of the second level. And in order to do this, I'm just going to get a few references from the floor that I created on the previous level. So I'm going to copy once again the pound of the previous level. Mainly because I want to avoid selecting all these boundaries once again as well. Something that you're going to notice is that this floor is going to be a little bit different because of the design or certain areas of the project, but also because of a floor that I'm going to create later on as a quick sign, something that you can do once you already know that the walls are going to remain the same, is actually constrain the boundaries of the floor to the layers of the wall. Now in this case, I'm not going to do this because once again, I want to make sure that you're able to see how a project is normally handled in driving, when you don't know everything that you're going to do on the project, even though I already know how the project is going to look like. Now while reading the boundary of this floor, you're going to notice a couple of things. One of them is the many of the lines that I paste. And this is because this boundary doesn't actually use many of the same references. The second thing is that I can keep using the mirror in order to save a little bit of time at this floor will require a different family type, because this one is going to be placed about the previous level. Because of this, the layers are going to be a little bit different. With this in mind, I'm going to add the structure of the floor in order to add additional layers. Also, in order to change the palace of these layers based on the placing of the floor. After doing this, I'm just going to use once again an existing boundary in order to avoid mistakes when creating the next floor and the next family type. So I'm just going to finish creating this boundary and the family tie before selecting on the green check. As a quick sign, you're going to notice that these floors are actually created, taken into account, available below. The thickness of the floor is going to be a little bit different now. Once the floor has been created, I'm just going to create a different family type that I can assign to this floor. As a quick sign, you're going to notice that I'm not using the options that I have on this window. This is because this might create a few changes that you might not want on your project. Especially in this case because I don't want any of the changes happening without you being able to see it. Now this part of the project, I'm also going to be store, editing the extension of the walls based on the floors that already created. What doing this, you're going to notice that there are corrections that will need to be made before presenting your project to others, especially on how the floors connect to the walls as well. Since I already created the floors, I can use as a reference the height of an existing wall in order to add the height of the other walls of this level. As another quick sign up, you can also use wire frame in order to make sure that the boundaries are how you wanted, but also in order to select the floors a little bit easier. As you remember, you can also use the status in order to help you with your selections. Because there is an option on the status that allows you to select the elements by face and what is being said. I'm also going to make a few corrections on the walls of the project based on how I created the floors. Which means that I'm going to the extent of these walls, but also I'm going to create other elements of the project that would justify why some of these walls were created this way. Now the next floor that I'm going to create is a floor that is going to be in the air or in other words, this is a floor that is intended for something like a balcony. I'm going to use the following values on this boundary and also the tools that you can find on the modified panel in order to finish the boundary of this floor. Now once that I created this floor, I'm just going to it, the existing floor. Now if you're not able to select a floor plan, you can simply use step on the keyboard for another view on the project before selecting where it says it boundary as well. As you remember, if you select a boundary, gravity is going to make sure you have opened a view in which you can edit the boundary by using go to view. I'm just going to edit this boundary the following way because I'm going to take into account how those floors are built on the project. After doing this, you will be able to see, once again, the floors on the sections of the project. But also you are going to be able to notice how the project is going so far by using the other views of the project in mind. I'm going to add the presentation of the view based on changes that I have done, other views, which means that I'm going to change the scale as well as how the levels are presented. So as you can see, writing and editing the floors in sexually praising regardless of the changes they do on the project. 55. Placing the Roofs (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this part of the exercise, I'm just going to continue with the basic elements you need to create on the project. In this case, what I'm going to create is the roof. In order to do this, I'm going to go to the bill panel in order to select the tool that is roof, while creating the boundary of the screw. You're going to notice, but I'm going to add an upset. But also I'm going to change the base level based on the properties. As well as you to notice, select stew the walls of reference for these boundaries. Which means that I'm not going to be used on the core of the wall as the reference for the subset, mainly because the subset on a construction is actually built this way. Another reason for this is because the overhang might actually create a few issues when creating a boundary that is not only using as a reference the walls of your project. Because of this, big walls might have a few issues with the design that I'm going to use on the roof as well. You're going to notice that I'm going to edit this roof in order to disable this slow on this boundary or edge of the roof. After finishing with this boundary, I'm just going to click on the green check in order to show it the result. After creating this roof, I can simply use, once again, the mirror to recommend in order to avoid creating the roof on the other side. Additionally, I'm going to create another roof for this area that is going to be very similar to the other roofs of the project. However, I'm still going to remove the slope of all the edges for boundary lines of one other sides of the roof. And after editing the boundary the following way, I'm just going to click on the green check before creating another roof. As you might have noticed by this point, I'm creating a roof for the different levels that are created for the roofs. Which means that I'm also going to create a roof for this level. However, this roof is going to be a little bit different because of this loop that I'm going to use, which is the reason why not creating a family type or the other roofs of the project as well. Going to create another roof that is going to cover all the remaining areas on the project. However, this roof is going to be a little bit different because it's going to have an additional element under the sign. In order to avoid creating an additional roof, I'm just going to add additional boundaries and then I go into the Sac Slow on one of the edges or boundary length. And as I mentioned before, this is something that you can also do by creating two roofs and then using joint roof. However, in this case, I'm just going to select on the green check in order for you to see the result of creating the by just simply using the boundary in order to finish this roof. I'm also going to change this slope. Slope is actually based on the units that are currently being used on the project. I'm going to change the units of this slow the percentage. However, in your country region, you might need to use different units. Regardless of the units that you use, remember to use the following slope in order to get the same result as you are going to notice that this slope of this roof is going to be very different. The other one, because the structure of this roof is going to be different. I'm just going to finish changing this slope of the roofs before showing you the result as well. You're going to notice that also using a different slope on this roof and this is because of a few elements that are going to place later on. That's a quick sign in order to appreciate this a little bit better remeber you can use the treaty view, but also that you can actually change the visual style that you're using, the treaty view. So you're going to notice that by default I would create a roof based on the thickness that the roof is supposed to have. If you are the structure of the roof. However, I'm going to create a family tie that is now going to take into account the structure of the roof after creating this roof. And also going to create an additional family type that is going to be used on this roof. Now this family type is actually similar to the floors. This structure is going to be pretty much the same. However, the values and the layers are going to depend only on the layers that you really need to have when creating this roof. However, there are layers that you can actually use in order to make this a little bit better. Because in a few cases, you want to create a roof with a few specific elements that allows the roof to isolate the project a little bit better. Additionally, I'm going to create another roof on this project. Now this roof is going to be a little bit different because I'm going to create the roof place and roof by extrusion instead of roof by footprint. Which means that I'm going to go once again to the built panel in order to select roof by on the struct. Once that I have done this, I'm able to select the reference that I want to use in order to place this roof. In this case, I'm going to select this phase and then I'm going to be able to select the reference level and observe this roof before creating the intrusion as well. I'm going to create this roof by taking into account the same slope that is being used on most of the other roofs, as well as the family type on the other roofs. As a quick sign, you're going to notice that I'm using once again, the symmetry of this project. In order to save a little bit of time after finishing with this roof, I'm just going to select the same family type that I have used in most of the other roofs. Before selecting the green check and after creating this roof, I'm just going to the extension of this roof I suppose on for you to notice is that you can actually change this family type to any of the other family types that you have on the project in order to save a little bit of time when creating this structure of the project. Which means that if you're not going to create the structure of a project, you actually need to create all the elements that are going to be used on the roof. So when you create an architecture project, you're actually able to save a lot of time on the structure of the roof as well. I can also change elements that are already created on the project based on the placement of the roofs. As you can notice, the roofs are actually pretty easy to create an edit. When you have an idea, I'll do the sign that you want to use and you can still update the roofs based on the changes that you might be doing your project. 56. Placing the Ceilings (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this part of the exercise or project, I'm going to be creating the ceilings. Now, you can create the ceilings of the project by going to the build panel in order to select the tool that is called ceiling. The ceilings are easy to create if you already have the walls of the project, because you can create the ceilings based on the option that is called automatic ceilings. However, when you use the tomatic ceilings, you are going to notice that the ceilings are placed based on the high upset. You will need to make sure that the ceilings are placed based on the height of the walls that you're using as a boundary for the aromatic ceiling as well. You can see that revel lets you know you're not able to see the ceiling on this view. Which means that you can use another view of the project in order to see where the ceiling has been placed. In order to do this a little bit better, I'm also going to create additional views on the project. I'm going to create a few additional sections that can be used in order to see the remaining ceilings, but also in order to see where the other ceilings are going to be placed as well. I'm creating these views because they're going to be very useful. Once that I get to the sheets, as a quick sign, you can actually use the tools recommends that you have on the modified panel in order to do this a little bit easier. And this is because these annotations are also elements of the project. Which means that Revit recognizes these elements as other elements of the project. And as well as send for you to notice is that you can use the flee controls in order to change the direction of the section or in other words the direction that you want to use in order to your project. I start doing this, I'm going to create the ceilings of the next level of the project. And what doing this you're going to see once again, the previt is not able to display ceiling on this view of the project. A quick signer and you are going to notice, but you can also create a level just for the ceilings because the ceilings use the levels as a host. However, in the case of the ceilings necessary because you don't need to create additional references in your project just to do this, a quick signer, you can also use the Tom on the modified panel in order to do this. However, the ceilings is kind of unnecessary if you're creating an center ceiling. So as you notice, the ceiling is also easy to create it because you have options such as boundary, which means that you can edit the boundary as well as create the boundaries by using a sketch ceiling. As well. You're going to notice that this is also going to be very useful in order to see how the other elements of the project are placed in relationship to the other elements. Or in other words, how the walls are placed based on the floors and vice versa. Naspic sign, you can use the word frame on us, such as this one, in order to see where the ceilings have been placed, but also in order to see where the other elements of the project have been placed without having to use the sections. Before moving along to the other elements of the project, I'm going to use these views in order to start editing the elements. They are already placed on the project based on the other elements there, but also based on how these elements will be built on a construction. With this in mind, I'm just going to take a little bit of time making a few adjustments on these elements. One of the adjustments that I'm going to make is based on the floor. I'm going to the profile was based on the boundaries of the floor that I created before and after doing this, you're going to notice that I can save a little bit of time by just simply using the symmetry of the project. And after making the changes on the wall and also going to edit a little bit I fewer notations on the other views of the project. Pens a quick signer permit that you can open the different views of the project place and in additions, and I started doing this, I'm also going to add the wall for this area of the project. Because of this, I will need to edit the floors of this project after editing the profit of this wall. So after selecting the green check, I'm going to addit the bundle of the floors based on the changes on the wall. And since already added this floor, I will also need to add the floors already Ted to this one. All of this being said, you're going to notice that the roofs are pretty easy to create and also based on the design of your project, but also based on if you would need to create the structure of the roof or not. On this project, I'm going to be able to show you the different options that you have in order to present family systems such as the roofs. 57. Placing The Components: The different elements that you can place in rabbit be confusing at first. Because you can place family systems as well as families. However, this way in order to differentiate between a family system and a family, the family system can be used as a host while the family is going to need a host. One of the best examples of a family is the doors. Because the doors requires the walls as a host. Which means that by default, you won't be able to place a door outside of the walls that can be created by using a family system. In order to place a door, you need to go to the B panel to select the door to recommend as well as the notice is that the door to gum as a circuit, which is the S and David are roaming. Once you select the door to commend, you're going to notice that you can place the door anywhere on the wall. However, the placement of the door will depend also on the level that you're working on if you're using a plan view in order to place the door. Which means that if the level that is visible on this plan view is level one, then the door is going to be placed on level one. In this case, the door and the window are going to be placed on the same level because both of them are actually placed by using the same floor plan. So important for you to know is that you can place the doors by using plan views, but also by using elevations and sections, which means you're going to be able to place the door in all the different views that you hold a project, including the treaty views. Also you're going to see the regardless of the way in which you place the door, it's going to display the aromatic dimensions while placing the doors on the hot. If you want to see the aromatic dimensions after placing the doors, you just need to select these families once again. Now, the doors can actually be moved within the host. And you can actually do this in different ways, such as, for example, the present, as well as the tools they have on the modified panel as well. You're going to see that the automatic dimensions can use as a reference the center of the doors. And this is because the template that is used in order to create these families as a reference at the center of the door. Since you're able to see the aromatic dimensions after selecting the door, you're also going to be able to use the aromatic dimensions in order to move the door. That's a quick sign. You're also going to notice that you can use the controls that you have on the doors in order to change the direction in which the door is going to open. The placement of the door, it's actually pace, not only automatic dimensions, but also on the position of the balls when you place the door. So this means that you can place the door anywhere that you want within the wall. But also you are going to be able to control the orientation of the door, as well as the position of the door in different ways, especially because of the automatic dimensions. As you can see, placing and editing the placement of the doors, as all of this is going to apply to another element that uses the wall as a host. And this one is the windows. Now the windows can be placed by also selecting a Tom on the bill panel. You can place the windows by selecting the windows on the bill panels on the Sir, which in the case of the windows is going to be doubling and ascendancy. Once you select the windows to argument, you're going to see, you can place the windows by using a plan view, an elevation, as well as a tree view just like the doors. Which also means you're going to be able to see the aromatic dimensions were placed on the windows. However, the windows will also allow you to use other elements as a reference when it comes to the height of the window. This is because the windows have a property that is a still height. Now this property is actually used in order to determine the height of the window based on the level in which you place the window. Which means that the windows by depot are actually placed based on a level. We by default the use is still high as an observe from the level in which you place the windows. Once you place the windows, you're going to notice that you can move the windows in the same way that you move the doors, which means that you can also use the aromatic dimensions. You are going to be able to decide the orientation of the window, as well as the placement of the window with a lot of precision while working on your project. But also that the placement of the windows, just as the doors, is placed in the direction of the mouse, one place in the door. However, you're still going to be able to use one of the controls that you have on the doors in order to flip the direction of the window, as well as the doors. The windows are going to have just one control while the doors are going to have to controls. As I mentioned before, the families made a host. The different family systems that you can place on your project will determine how you're going to place the families. However, in the case of elements such as the walls you are going to see, they will also determine what elements can you place. In the case of another family system such as the floor, you are going to be able to see that they are going to be families. They are going to recognize the floor as a host. And this one are elements such as the furniture. As a quick sign, the floors are used as a host the same way regardless of the floor type or in other words the family type they are using. Which means that this is going to function the same way, even when creating the structure of your project. In order to place these families, you can go once again to the build panel. In order to select the place a component, you can select this tool or to men, or you can use S and Charlie, Mas Mary as a circuit. Once you select this tool, you are going to see all the families that are available within this template. Which means that you are going to be able to see not only the doors and the windows, but also the other families that are loaded on the project. You're going to be able to place families such as this one on your project. However, you are going to see that these families are not going to use the wall as a, which means that these families are intended for a host like this one as well. Something for you to notice is that the abuse are also going to determine if you're placing the element outside of the host to place in these families. And just going to select each other families in order for you to see which host has been assigned to each other families. As you can see, one of the families is no used on the floor host. Instead of using the floor, it's used on the level. This is because the levels can be used as hot, which is something that you can notice at the moment that you place elements such as the floors, the walls and the ceilings. As you might have noticed by this point the levels can be used as a host for the family systems as a quick Sino family systems such as the ceilings can also be used as they are families, they can only be placed on the ceilings. This is something that might also be confusing because Rabbit already has a library with families already created for a specific as well. You are going to see that each of the families will have properties that you can change. You're going to be able to select the family in order to change the properties of one or multiple families by using the same family type. In the case of the doors, you are going to be able to change the level that is being used for the placement as well as the steel he which will allow you to add an upset relative to the level in which the door has been placed as well. You're going to be able to change the swing angle. Or in other words, it will be able to change the angle in which the door is open or it can open. You can use this for the accurate representation of the doors in your project or just to change the representation based on how you want to present your project. In the case of the windows, you are going to have also the level as well as the steel height. You're going to be able to change the steel height of the window. Also based on the level in which you place the window as well. There are a few properties just for the windows, such as, for example, the window insert. Now the window insert is something that is going to change the upset of the window relative to the placement of the window. Which means that this is not going to change the placement of the window, but rather the appearance of the window within the wall. Now, the window insert is also determined by the references that are used at the moment that the family is created. As you can notice, editing the doors and windows is very similar. However, there are properties they only use on the doors or the windows. Now, all that has been said, something for you to know, is that the properties that you can see after selecting a family are the ones that are created along with the family. Which means that these properties are created while creating the family. What is being said? The families that you can place in your project are created in such a way that you will have different families for different uses. Which is the reason why it has not only a library of components, but also a library of templates that you can use in order to create the families that you can place in your project. 58. Loading other Families: On this slide. And what I want to show you is how you can load a family to a project. But more specifically, the different options that you have in order to load a family. And starting first how you can load a family that is used in the same that you are using, which in this case is going to be the same family systems. In order to create the door, I'm going to select first the door to recommend and then I'm going to go to where it says load family. Once I have done this, you're going to see a window that will allow you to search for the family that you want to load to the project. Once you find the family that you want to load, just have to select it and then select process open. Now once you do this, you are going to notice that you have another window which will allow you to specify the family types that you want to load to the project. Now the family types are the ones that are created along with the family. Something important for you to notice is the units. Because the family already has units, they're already assigned to it. Which means that the units of the families will depend on how they were created. In this case, you can notice that this library is actually using inches. However, you're also going to notice that bit is also going to show you the units they are using. The project right next to the name of the family type. What this means is that you will need to keep in mind the units that were used in order to create a family. As a quick sign, the libraries that are created by this are available on imperial and metric units. You can simply choose which one do you want to use as well. Something for you to see is that there is more than one way in order for you to load a family that is using the same family system. You're going to be able to use the type of window in order to load a family to the project. As long as it's using the same family system as well, you are going to see that you can select once again among the family types that you want to look with this family as a great sign, if you are going to select one or multiple family types, you will need to keep in mind that you will need to select at the very least one family type. Once I loaded this family, you are going to see that all the family types that are selected are available on the type selected as well by depot, You actually load all the family types at the moment they open a family. Which means that if you select any of the families and then you collect recess open by Deft is going to load all the family types that are available for the family. However, you're also going to notice that some of the families will only have one family type. And this is because the family type will need to be created along with the family. It doesn't automatically create family types. Every time the lot of family, you will be able to see the family types the selected on the type selector. As a quick sign, remember that the family systems also function as a category, which is the reason why the library has folders and perhaps other folders within those folders. The folders that you can see are the categories that you have in Ravi is going to be very useful. Loading different families that are using the same family system. But if you want to load family, there is no using the same family system gravis going to display a window, letting you know that you cannot actually load a family that is not using that same family system. Which means that if you try to do this, you won't be able to pick systems are incompatible. When this happens, you will have two options. One of them is actually use a family system that will allow you to load a family of your choosing to your project. Or you can simply use the Insert Tab. And this is because on the Insert Tab you also have the option to load a family. However, this option will allow you to load any family that you want to load to the project. As long as you're not using specific to recommend. If you're using to recommend such as this one, revit will not allow you to load another family. There is no use in that family system. If I cancel recommend you are going to be able to see that I can load any family that I want. However, you won't be able to place the family actually using the right to argument. This is going to be more useful when you're using the place a component to commend because this can place the component that was just loaded to the project. However, you will still need to keep in mind for the families that you load to a project. And still using family systems that you can load by using a specific tools or commend. Which means that it is useful for you to know which families can load by using those tools or commends. All of this is being said, you can load families to a project at any point even without knowing the family system they are using. 59. The Filter: When selecting the elements that you were replacing your project. You may have noticed that you have selected an element that you didn't want to select. When this happens, you're able to use the selection tools and options in order to make corrections on your selection. However, you might have also noticed that on this tab you have a panel that is called selection. On this panel, you're going to be able to find the filter to recommend. Now the filter to recommend will allow you to change your selection by using this window. Now on this window, you're going to notice the category is the selected, but also the elements within the same category. Which means that the filter actually uses the category in order to change the selection as well. You're also going to notice that the too will appear on this window, but also on the status part. And this is because the status part also allows you to open this window. In order to change your selection, you just need to check check the categories that you can find on this window. While doing this, you're also going to notice that the total is going to update on this window. However, it's not going to update on the status part until you select Races supply. Now the filter such is very useful because you are going to be able to change your selection based on the categories that you didn't want to select. Which means that you can select multiple elements regardless of the category. But you can select them and select them. If you check the category on this window as well, you're going to have a few options in order to make this a little bit easier. Such as, for example, the option that is called check none and the option that is call check all. With these two options, you're going to be able to select only the categories that you want to keep on your selection. Or you can simply remove the categories that you don't want in your selection. Now what is being said? You are going to notice that you don't need to use the selection that I'm using in order to do this. And this is because the filter window can actually be open. As long as you select more than two categories, regardless of how many elements of the same category you selected, as was the there on the same panel that you have, the filter. You also have options for the selections, which means that you are going to be able to save your selection, which is actually very important because you will be able to save a selection that you might need to use multiple times while working your project. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to create a couple of selections with different names, because each of these selections are going to be saved on the file, which means you cannot use the same name on multiple selections. And once I have done this, I'm going to be able to show you, can you load the selections? Instead of selecting where it says save, I'm going to select where it says look. And once that I select the option that is load selection, you're going to be able to see. Then now you have a window that will allow you to select among the selections that have been saved. However, the name of this window actually implies that these are filters. And this is because the selections use the same principle as the filters. In other words, the selection are the elements of your project after filtering the elements that you don't want to select. Which means that you can save your selection after using the filter, but also that you can edit the selection that you selected. By using the filter will even allow you to create a new selection as well. Something for you to know is that you can save your selection also using the managed tab. Which means that on the managed tab you're also going to find the selection panel. However, on the selection panel you won't be able to find the filter from here. You won't be able to load any of these filters or selections. Which also means that you can use the filter, the selection that you loaded, by using this window, as long as the selection includes multiple categories. With this in mind, you can save and load the selections at any point without being able to use the other selection options such as the filter, as well as something important for you to know. You're also going to be able to add the selection that you will re save. Instead of using save or lost selection, you can simply use selection in order to open this window. On this window, you will be able to select among the selection filters before selecting the option. Let us go Edit. And once you select Set It, you're going to notice that you have a new tab in order to add the selection. And on this tab you're going to have a couple of panels. One of them will allow you to cancel or finish added on the selection, while the other one will allow you to actually add the selection. As a quick sign, you can always use the filter as long as the selection includes two or more categories. Now if you click on Cancel, you're going to go back to this window. With this, you're going to be able to add the selection by making the selection once again or you can simply close this window. Now, editing the selection is actually pretty easy because the only thing that you need to do is actually or remote elements of the selection. If I select one of the selection filters and then I use the option that is called, you are going to be able to notice and I can simply add elements to the selection. As a quick sign, the elements that are part of the selection are going to appear highlighted. In order to validate the change on the selection set, you just need to select, it says Finish Selection. However, you're always going to be able to remove elements from the selection by editing the selection once again. Which means that you can add or remove elements from the same selection without creating a new we. With this in mind, you are going to be able not only to create the selections by using the selection options such as the filter, but also you will be able to low and edit the selections while working in your project. Suppose important for you to know is that this window will also allow you to manage the filters. You're going to be able to create a new filter by selecting, whereas new, when you select here says new, you are going to be able to create a new filter that you are going to use a selection set. However, based on the selection options that we have covered so far, select or usec selection. Now if you select, you're going to notice that you will need to select the elements that you want to add to the selection set or filter by using this step. Which means that you can use add to selection and remove to selection before selecting says fans selection sick sinus, the elements that are part of the selection are going to appear highlighting before using any of the options on the tap. That is called Edit Selection set. Since you're able to create your own selection set filter or selection filter, you're also going to be able to use the option that is called winning in order to change the name. However, the name cannot actually use a name that is currently used. While doing this, you're going to see what considers the same. In this case, I'm just going to finish changing the name in order for you to see that you can also use this window in order to delete the selection set filter or selection filter. As you might have noticed by this point, Robin uses different names. When it comes to the selections. At the beginning, it might be a little bit confusing because the selection set the selection filter and the filter refers to the same thing. 60. Filtering your selection Using the Properties Palette: Now as well, there is a very straightforward way in order to select within multiple elements at the same time. The way that you do this is by actually using a filter. They have the properties palette. Now this filter will allow you to know which type of element is selected. However, this case by default, the view is the one that is selected because I haven't selected any elements. Also, because you need to have a way in order to modify the properties of the view even when selecting an element. Now this filter will show you the same type that you have on the type properties window. Also, you have the drop down in order to change the family type, which in this case is not really useful. If I select the following elements, you're going to notice that on this filter now you have the elements that you have selected which is the same amount that you have right next to the filter icon on the Status Bar. Now if you use the filter, you are going to be able to see the same basic information that you have on the filter window. However, in this case, instead of using checkboxes like you have on the filter window, you're going to have a simple drop them that will allow you to select one of the categories or family types that you have in the Rpm. Once you have done this, you're going to be able to use the type selector in order to change the family type, but also you are going to be able to use the type properties window specifically for this family type as well, since I haven't removed the selection, unable to cycle through the elements that are selected, but also unable to select the floor plan view by using the strap. This is another way to simplify your selection while working in your project. 61. The Match Type Properties: Now on the clip or panel, you also have an option or an alternative to the type selector which are normally used by selecting the element and then changing the type that you want to use, whether it isn't one element or multiple elements at the same time and when is called match type properties. So the way that it works is that after you selected the element, you go to the clip or panel in order to use match type properties. Or you just simply use the shortcut, MS and Mary, S, and Apple. This one will allow you to use the properties of one particular family or family system in order to copy the type properties from this family or family system to another family or other family system of the same class. What the match type properties actually does is storage the properties that you normally have on the Clippard. So you can go ahead and paste the same properties on the other family or family system of the same class. The way this actually works is the ones that you use the match type properties. Use the left click on the mouse in order to select the family or family system that you want to use. And then use the left click on the mouse once again in order to select the family to which you want to apply the properties that you have on the click board. And once you have done this, you will notice that now both families are using the same properties. Which pretty much means that now they are the same family, or in this case the same family type. And this is something that you can use as many times as you want with different elements. Now, you don't need to select the element before using match type properties if you're using the shortcut. And as you might have noticed, you're able to apply these properties to multiple elements. And also you can use the match type properties between elements as the furniture, because as I mentioned before, they just have to be in the same class. If you're not familiar with the classes, a class is, for example, the walls, the floors, the ceilings, the roofs, among others. Such as the class of family that I'm using right now. This is pretty useful when creating your project and you just simply want to go ahead and use a family, the T right away or without having to rely on the selection options and the type selected. 62. Hide and Unhide: When creating your projects and revit, you are going to see that there is a few options in order for you to hide the elements on the project, whether it is by element or by category. If you select one of the elements that you have in your project, you are going to be able to see an option that is called Hide in View after opening this menu by using the mouse. And if you hold this option, you will be able to notice that you can hide the elements or the categories on the view. If you, you're going to see that now the element doesn't appear on the view. If you want to see the elements that are hitting on the view, you will be able to use the option that is call reveal hitting elements. Once they use this option, you will be able to see the elements that are hitting on the view with a different appearance. This will be very useful because you will be able to know which element is hidden. But also you will be able to select the element in order to hide the element by opening this menu once again. Then send the option that is on Hid in View. Once you hold where it says on Hid in View, you will be able to select the option that is Elements. As I mentioned before, you're able to do the same thing with the categories. That you will be able to open this menu once again in order to hold where it says on Hid in View. And then select Recess Category. Once you select Recess category, you are going to notice that all the elements that are within the same category are going to disappear from the view. Or in other words, they are going to be hidden on this view. If you want to reverse the changes, you can use once again reveal hit elements in order to open this menu once again by using the mouse. Once you open this menu, just need to hold where it says On Hiding view and then select Recess Category. With this in mind, you are going to be able to show or hide not only the elements but also the categories within your project. Which is also very useful because you can also use in order to know which elements are considered part of the same category. Because at the beginning, some of the categories might seem a little bit confusing, especially because V has multiple categories for multiple specialties as well. Something for you to notice is that you can do the same thing by using the tools or commands that you can find disrupt them. Which means that you are going to be able to hide the elements that are selected by selecting where it says elements. As a quick sign, this option or tool has a circuit and this one is a network, HS and hotel. Which also means that you can also use once again reveal hitting elements in order to reveal the elements that are hitting by using the suption. But also in order to use the new options that you have on the modified tab. More specifically, in order to hide the elements by selecting where it says on high elements as well. You're going to see that this tool or option also has a circuit. You can select this tool or you can simply use a circuit which is a new, use an umbrella. Once that you do this, you are going to see that the element is actually visible on the view as well. Since you can use the options in order to hide an element, you are going to see that you have the option in order to hide the category by either using this option or the circuit which is going to be S Victor H as hotel. Once again, you are going to notice that you can use elements in order to see the hiding elements, but also in order to hide the category by selecting the option or by using the circuit which is Victor US umbrella. So this and mining to notice that you have different ways in order to do the same. I suppose something for you to know is that you have another way in order to do the same. If you select an element within your project, you can use the menu that you can open by selecting the two recommend in order to hide the elements. However, this is going to be a little bit different. Which means that on this case, you can reveal hidden elements in order to see the element. Or elements that are hidden with a different appearance because of the fact that now this option is also used to display elements that are isolated on the view. Now this may seem a little bit confusing of force because these options do something very similar. However, the options are used very differently. On this case, I'm going to open once again this menu in order to reset the temporary height and isolate. Once I have done this, you're going to see that the element will be visible on the view as well. Since you're able to use this options in order to hide an element, you're also going to see you can use the options in order to hide the category. Which means we are going to be able to hide all the elements within the same category. But also we will be able to reset the changes by using once again reset and very high and isolate While doing this, you're going to notice that you don't need to select the elements within the view in order to use this option. This means that using the suptionss a little bit different from using the menu that you can open with a mouse or the tool circus you have on the B while selecting the elements. This is because you're actually using the in order to avoid selecting unnecessary elements, In order to isolate specific elements or categories. With this in mind, you're going to notice that you can use this option in order to isolate an element, which will also mean that you're going to be able to use this option in order to reveal heating elements as well as elements that are hitting or isolated. By using the options on this menu, you can use once again reset, temporary hitting and isolated elements in order to revert the changes. If you revert the changes, you're going to notice that the appearance of the elements will go back to default even if you're using the option in order to reveal heating elements are isolated on the projects. For you to know is that you're going to be able to use also with the categories which is actually very useful because you will be able to add the categories without instructions. All of this is being said. You are going to be able to use these options in cases in which you will need to make sure they are seeing only the elements that you want to see on the view, whether it's for presentation or for editing your project. However, all these changes are temporary on the view, which means that they will not apply to the view. If you want to apply the changes to, you can do by using this menu. You will need to first hide or isolate the elements or categories within the view. Then you will need to open this menu once again in order to select the options. Apply, isolate the view. After using this option, you're going to see that the changes have been applied to the view or in other words, the other elements are going to be the ones they are going to be hitting on the view. But more importantly, you won't be able to reset the changes because they have been applied to the view. In order to do these changes, you will need to use control, which means that you can also use controls in order to do the same thing that you can do using the option of reset temporary high isolate. 63. The Dimension: While working in your project, you will get to a point in which you will need to assign your project to somebody else. Because of this, you will need to make sure that you're using the right measurements, but also you will need to display those measurements to others. In those cases, what you actually use is the dimensions. Now the dimensions in Revit are pretty much the dimensions that you can also use in other software such as Adc. However, with a few minor changes based on the way the grade your projects in Revit, you create the dimensions by using, for example, the modified panel. Because on the modified panel, you can find the tools they use in order to add the dimensions to your project. The first tool that you're going to find is the aligned dimension. The aligned dimension is the one that is set by default. Now you can use this tool by either selecting this tool or by using the circuit which is the in India. And once they use the To recommend you are going to see you will need to select references that you can use in order to create the dimensions. One of the best examples is the grids. You can notice how easy you can dimension the grids, especially because you can select multiple references with a single dimension in order to finish the dimension, you just need to select on an empty space or in other words, on an area of your project in which you don't have any references that can be selected with this dimension. With this in mind, you're able to dimension your project based on what you want to verify or based on what you want to present to others. But also you don't need to select multiple references at the same time or only the type of references on your project. That's important for you to know about the dimensions is that you can use the dimensions on all the views of your project trees. More importantly, the dimensions are going to function in the same way. You don't have to change how you create dimensions on different views if you have any issues selecting the references. You also have a way in order to select the references that you might not have been able to select by using this to recommend one you reference, but you might need to add to this dimension. If you select the dimension, you are going to see that on the modified panel for the dimensions, you have an option or tool that is called the witness lines which you can also use with a shortcut. Yes, a network, S and water. As you can notice, you can actually use this not only in order to add references but also in order to remove them. Once that I select Edit Witness Lines, you're going to see that I can add more references to the dimensions that I'm able to remove the references from the dimension. As you might have noticed, placing the dimensions is actually easy. Editing the references is also easy to do while editing your project. You can update your projects at any point and then just simply update the dimensions to the changes. There's a quick sign the dimensions are part of the nations, which means that the view is going to determine if you're able to see the notations or not. Something as well for you to know is how to move the dimensions, because in some cases, you might need to move the dimensions. Another way that you move the dimensions is fairly standard because you can move the dimensions like you move almost any other element on your project. You can click and drag the dimensions to another position. But also you can move the dimensions, Pacing the errors on the keyboard. Depending on the position of the dimensions, you are going to be able to use the keyboard in order to move the dimensions in a particular direction. Since the way that you move the dimensions is pretty much a standard. Then you can also use the tool circum on the modified panel. In order to do this, you can use, for example, the tool to move the dimensions, any other element of the project. However, you do have to take into account that they are still attached to the reference that are used in order to create the dimensions. Because of this, you can simply use the R on the keyboard to do the same as a quick sign if you have any issues moving the dimension By using the move tool that you can select the option that is called the joint, in order to avoid any restriction or constraint on the movement of the dimension. By this point you are going to notice that you can change the placement of the dimensions but also that you can edit the references that you're using the dimensions as another quick sigin, you're able to use the move tool. You're also going to be able to use the tool that is called copy. You're going to be able to copy the dimensions if you need to or want to. With this, you're going to be able Add more options to the way that you add the dimensions as well. Something else for you to know is that the dimensions also have controls that you can use in order to change how you present the dimension, but also the references that the dimension is using. This means they will be able to use the controls in order to change the extension of this line, which is actually called extension line. As another quick sign. Other changes that you can do to the dimensions can be undone by using control, as you will be able to use this other control in order to change the reference that you're using. Which means they don't have to use added witness lines. If you're only changing the references that you're using other dimensions, you're only changing the references that you're using at the beginning or at the end of the dimension as well. You're going to see that there is a control that actually allows you to change the position of the text. Now as a quick sign, when you change the position of the text, you might see a liter line. Now the liter can be enabled or disabled by using the properties. You can enable or disable this line if you want to. Something else for you to notice is that the notations also have to be taken into account on the presentation of your project. One of the ways in which you can make sure that the notations are presented properly is by using the lines. However, when placing the dimensions, you might want to enable thin lines in order to make sure that you're selecting the right references. Because some of the tools that you can use in order to dimension the project have options. The aligned dimension will allow you to change the reference that you're using within the walls. Which means that the aligned dimension is intended mainly for the walls. So you're going to notice that you can select from center lines we face center core and phases of core. However, when using these options on the options part, you can notice that you can actually change, select the references. Which means you can select the references manually or you can select the option that is called entire walls. Now when you use this, you're going to notice that you are going to be able to select the entire element that is on the view, you can select all the elements under the category of walls, which means that you won't be able to do this elements under different categories. You cannot use other components and other family systems. However, there are elements within the components that can be used as a reference Because you need to present your project to others, which also means that you need to provide the right measurements of your project. This is mainly because you actually have different dimensions that are intended for different uses. If you go to the modified tab, you are going to see that you can open a drop them with the different dimensions that you can use in your project. Instead of using the aligned dimension, you can actually select the one that is called linear dimension. Now this dimension actually allows you to select references that you cannot select with the aligned dimension. This is because you can select the end points of the elements. Instead of selecting the entire walls or lines, you are going to see that you can actually select the end points of those lines. As you can see, the options are going to change a little bit when using this dimension. However, you can still the witness lines as a quick sign. The elements on the project will determine the dimensions that you will need to use. Because of this, you can always change or edit the dimensions in different ways. Which means that you can change, for example, the position of the text. Now, the next dimension that you can find by using the structure is the angular dimension. Now the angular dimension is going to be pretty much the same as the aligned dimension. However, it is going to use the lines as a reference in order to show you the angles between those lines as a quick sign. When using any of these dimensions, you are going to notice that you have the other dimensions that you can select on the modified tab, which means that you can change among the different dimensions, one placing any of these dimensions. However, I'm not going to cover other dimensions because many of these dimensions are related to elements that we haven't covered the project. Now the next dimension that you're going to find is radio dimension. The radio dimension, as the name implies, allows you to create a dimension based on the radius of an arc or a circle. This dimension is also useful because it allows you to see the center of the R and the circle as well. Since you can create a radial dimension, you're also able to create a diameter dimension. The diameter dimension allows you to create a dimension based on the diameter of a circle. This is a little bit different because the radius is half of the diameter. The users are going to depend on the project that you're creating as well. Something useful for you to know is that you can also find all the dimensions that you have on the modified panel on the annotate tab. You can go to the annotate tab in order to use any of these dimensions. And this is because the dimensions are part of the annotations. You can annotate your entire project at the same time. As I mentioned before, the nations can be used on different views of your project. You can use these notations in order to create the dimensions on specific elements, for multiple elements at the same time, which also means that you can use different dimensions for different purposes. As a quick sign, remember that you can move the dimensions by using the errs on the keyboard. The tools comments that you have on the modified panels will be equal to place and edit the dimensions depending on the elements of your project. While at the same time you can edit the witness lines at any point. All of this being said, creating and editing the dimensions is actually creating, not only because of how you place these notations, but also how you can add or remove references from the dimensions at any point, while also taking into account the different dimensions that you can use because of the different elements that you can place on your project. 64. The Clipboard Panel: In it. As in most softwares, you actually have options in order to copy and paste elements within your project. How? In Revit on the modifying tab, you actually have a panel that is called Clipper. The Clipper actually allows you to copy and paste elements within the project. If, for example, we use this for elements that are already within the project in order to select them, we can actually copy them to the clip by using the copy to clip to recommend or by using control. How As well you can also use control plus insert. This will allow you to copy these elements to the clipboard in order to paste them later on. However as well, you can also cut these elements after selecting the elements by using the cut to clipper two or command. Or by using control X on the keyboard. Or even by using shift plus the Lit on the keyboard. Now the cut to clip two or command allows you to cut the element. So while the elements are on the clippard, either using cut or copy, you can go ahead and paste them from the clipper by using the default option, which is paste from clipboard. Or you can use the drop down in order to see the other options that you have on the clipboard By using the clipboard or by using control V on the keyboard, you're going to see the elements highlighted on the original position. However, once they are highlighted, you can actually move them or track them before finish pasting the elements. Which will also imply that you're able to edit the pasted elements before pasting them on the project. Now this as well will also go ahead and open this small little tab that is called Edit Paste. This will allow you to use the filter in order to filter through the elements that are selected as well. You can select all the elements within the selection, which means that you can edit the individual elements of the selection independently or all the elements at the same time as well. You can use the option that is called finalized selected in order to confirm the placement of the elements. Which is an option that you use when you're ready to select as finished. Now when you click on Finish or this green check, it is pretty much the same thing as using the green check after pasting the elements as well within this project, they're already created. You can also use other paste options that are actually more visible on an elevation view. By using this elevation. I'm going to copy these elements to the clipboard and then I'm going to use the Trot Align to selected levels, which will go ahead and open the select levels window. Now by using this window, I will be able to paste these elements on the levels that I selected. And once you selected the levels, you just have to click on Okay, So you can see the result on the elevation, and this will also keep their position on the selected levels. This is going to be useful for the annotations because you're going to be able to place annotations on different views without changing their position, as long as the reference also exists on those levels. If I create the following dimension and then I copy the dimension to the clipboard, I will also be able to paste this annotation on selected levels by using a line to selected views which is specific for annotations. So this will open the selects window, and once you selected the levels, you just have to click on Okay. So you can see the result. You open the level in which you past the nation. As you notice, the notation looks the same as the original one. Now there is another option that we can use after copying the following window, which will allow you to copy the same window that you already have on the clipboard to the view that you're using, which is called Align to Current View. You can use this when you're selecting elements on the lower levels of the project. As long as you are able to select the element, which means that this is something that will also depend on the view range. However, you need to be on the target view in order to use this. After copying the dimension, I can use the pace, struct them in order to select a line to the same place. Now this one will actually copy the element from the clipboard at the same place as the original one. This is pretty much double counting. If you actually use it with families, they're already within the project. After copying the following family, you can use a line to same place and drive. It will go ahead and let you know that you have two families within the same place. Which is something that doesn't apply to the dimensions because there are annotations that you can use for different purposes. This is something that you can keep using multiple times. A way that I actually use this is that I'm able to cut an element that I want to use later on. Once that is already on the clipboard, I use a line to same place once that I completed the changes that I needed to do or that I was going to do This way, the element will be unchained once that I past the element from the clipboard. Because of all of this, you can use this option when creating the sheets and also when creating new levels on an existing project. Additionally, this is an option that is even more useful between different projects because the clipboard is going to be the same for your projects. And the last option that you have on the drop them will allow you to paste an element after your having on the clipboard while using an elevation or a section. However, this option is based on how the elements selected or placed on the project. If I paste this window on the following level, you're going to notice that it's actually past based on the placement that the window that you copy actually had. So it's going to keep the same place just on a different level. This copy and paste option will be actually very useful while creating your projects. 65. Placing a Curtain Wall: On the next few lessons, I'm going to cover the cording walls. Now the courting walls are actually an independent family system under the category walls, which is the reason why you need to go to the wall tool on the build panel, in order to place the cording wall. In order to show you how the cording wall is actually placed, I'm going to use the wall to argument. However, you're going to notice they don't have a cording wall selected by default. Which means that I'm going to use the type selector in order to search for the cording walls on the structu. You're going to see the family types on this template, which in this case are going to be undefined, exterior placing and store front. Now in this case, I'm going to select the first family type, the lower. It says cording wall. In order to place this cording wall now well placed in this cording wall, you are going to notice then the options and the options will remain the same, which means that the cording walls are going to be placed in the same way that you place a basic wall. This is because the courting walls are under the Cao walls. However, there are going to be a few differences they are not going to be apparent at first as for example, the fact that the courting walls will have a control that is going to appear at the moment you place the courting wall. With this, you're going to notice that you can still use the same options that were used before. Also that the option that is called the location line is grayed out once the place. A few of these courting walls I'm just going to open dispear in order to show you that the properties are also going to function the same way. Which means that the properties are still going to determine the height of the courting wall as well as the levels of the cording wall based on if you're using the levels or not. Which means that you can still use the levels as a reference in order to change the base constraint and the top constraint. Which means that you can also still use and connect it. However, if you use the levels, you're also going to notice that you can also use the top upset and the base upset. Up to this point, you're going to notice that the courting walls doesn't have that many differences. With the basic wall means that you don't have to learn everything about the coding walls from scratch. However, the major difference between the coding wall and the basic wall is the structure of the cording wall. This is because the cording walls doesn't actually use layers. The cording walls actually use ions and panels. There are place based on the grid of the cording wall. Now the grid is something that you cannot see on the family type, that is called undefined. I'm going to change the family type of this courting wall to ster glazing. In order for you to see this grid. I'm going to change the other family type to store front in order for you to see not only the grids, the ions. Which means that the undefined creates a single panel. While the exterior glazing only creates the panels based on a grid. While the store front creates the ions and the panels based on the grid of the cording wall. Now this is something that may not be very easy to perceive in all the views of the project regardless of the use style. However, you can actually use the tredviw in order to see this is a little bit better. After opening the tree, you are going to notice the difference between the undefined exterior glazing and the store front. Now all of this is being said, you can actually create as many family types as you want. However, the basic elements that are used in order to create a Corbin wall, not going to change. The three family types that you have with this template are the ones that you can use depending on the design. Which means that you can use non define when you want a single panel. And you can use exterior placing when you don't need to use Ions and you can use the store front when you have a more traditional cording wall. 66. Editing the Curtain Walls: Once you've read, created the cording walls of your project. And you are going to notice that there is a few things that you can do in order to change the appearance of the cording wall. Such as, for example, changing the view style or the detail level. However, if you want to perceive all the elements that make the cording wall a little bit easier, one thing that you can do is used in lines. Being used in lines, let's see a little bit better, the Mos and the panels that make the cording wall. This is important in this lesson because what I want to show how you can edit the courting walls by using options or tools that you also have the basic wall. Because a few of these options or tools change the elements that make the courting wall. In this case, I'm going to store by creating a roof without a particular shape. I'm going to create a roof by footprint. But also I'm going to place this roof trying to make sure that this roof is placed based on the intersection of these lines. Once I finish, I'm just going to select where's finished in order to show you that you can attach the courting walls to this roof. And at first glance, everything is pretty much the same. However, it's going to let you know that in order to attach the cording walls to the roof, it will need to delete elements of the cording wall. And this is because the profile of the cording wall is going to change based on the roof. So depending on the sign that you have on the roof, you are going to get a different result. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to addit this roof by removing one of these slopes. Now, this is not actually going to change the courting walls, but rather what can you see on the view once that I have done this, You're going to notice that you can still use the shaped handles in order to the extent of the courting wall. And the courting wall is still going to be attached to the roof. That's why you're going to see, once again, they sit in line in order to let you see the original extent of the coding wall. All the courting walls are going to do the same regardless of the family type. However, the elements of the courting wall are going to be added or deleted depending on the options that you use. If you use the touch base, you are going to see the bit will need to delete elements the same way if you attach to base. However, you're going to see that this is actually because of the Moas, The exter glazing and then undefined are not going to do the same. However, since the profile of the cortin wall can actually be changed based on other elements such as the roof, you're also going to notice that you can simply select the cortin walls in order to edit the profile. Which means that you can edit the profile like on the basic walls, which also means that you won't be able to do this while also using the attachment. With this, you're going to notice that you can still use pretty much the same options that you have with the basic walls, including the one that is called reset profile. And if you use Receta, you are going to notice that you will be able to use once again other family systems in order to the courting wall. Which means that you can use an element such as the roof in order to the appearance of the cording wall without having to use additional tools or comments. And this also means that you can it more than one cording wall at the same time. Because you can attach multiple cording walls to a single roof or floor, which is something that you can notice if you change the properties of a roof or a floor that the cording walls are attached to. This is actually very important for you to know because you can actually the structure of the cording walls. So knowing what affects the courting walls becomes very important. Especially because by default, the courting wall is sexually constrained. Which means that you will need to consider the original shape of the courting wall depending on your design or in other words, depending if you're using a roof or a floor in order to change the extent of the courting wall or if you're editing the profile. To this point, you might have noticed that the similarities between the cording walls and the basic walls allows you to do pretty much the same things that you can do with the basic walls, but you will still need to take into account the elements that make the cording wall. 67. Adding and Removing Elements from the Curtain Wall: Now by continuing with the court walls, you're going to see that the cort walls have structure that you can create while working on your project. You're going to notice that the cording wall is created based on the panels and also on the structure. The store front is the closest type of cording wall that you're going to have to sending that you see on a construction. However, this doesn't change the fact that you can use the other cording walls while working your project. This is because all the structure that you can create on a cording wall is actually available by Architecture Tab. This means that you're going to be able to create this structure, or in another words, the create of the Cort wall by architectural tab, or more specifically, the build panel. When it comes to the grid, you are going to be able to create a cordon grid. Also, According now, the cordinion is nothing more than the structure that you can see on the store front. Or in another word, is an structure that is used in order to place the panels. Which means that you will need to place according onemion on the cording grids. Once again, you're going to be able to see that the first type according wall doesn't have according grid according one, while the second one has the Cortan grid, but it doesn't have according, while the third type will have the cording grid and according, or in other words it will. I'm going to click the Cortan grid to recommend, in order to add cortan grids to the first cord wall. When you do this, you're going to see a placement panel in order to determine the placement of the cording grip. Which means that you can select all segments in order to place a cordon grip across the cording wall. But also you can use one segment in order to place a cortan grip in just one of the segments. Which means that you can select all by the one that you pick, which is going to place a cording grid in all the segments, but the one segment that you selected. Something for you to notice is that this line represents the cording grid, while the hidden line represents the segments of the Cortan grid that are selected. As a quick signup, You can use or start cording grid in order to finish it, the cording system as a quick so if you have any issues while placing the cording grid, you can use control C in order to store again. Now at the same time, you can do almost the same thing by selecting a courting grid that is already on the cording wall. The only thing that you need to do is select the Cortan grid and then click says Add or Remove Segments. When you do this, you're going to see they will be able to add segments by using the elect click on the mouse. But also you will be able to remove them by also using the elect click on the mouse as a quick needs to be placed on a cording grid. If you delete a segment of a cording grid, you will actually delete the. Once you created the cordon grid, you can very much follow the same process by using the ions. This means that you will be able to add to a great line our something that you're going to notice is them is an independent family that you actually place on the cordon grid. Which means that what plays in the, you're going to see on the property is palette that you have a family type. This is something that is going to allow you to change the ion that you want to use, but also in order to change the appearance of the cording wall. Now while doing this, you're also going to sit around the placement you're able to select the great line segment is going to placemion on a specific segment of the cording grid. Which means that you can place Amion in order grid lines as a quick sin. Since you can have different elements within the structure of the cording wall, you're going to be able to see that you can use tap on the keyboard in order to select among the elements that are used in order to create the cording wall. In other words, if you press Tap on the keyboard, you will be able to select the Corta and the Cort grids. Now when you select the Corin grid, you're going to see an item that the grit is pin. As you remember, the pin is something that you can use by using the pin to orguen, or you can paint an element by clicking on the pin. Which also means that you can paint an element by using the pin. And as another quick signer, if you hover any of these elements, you are going to see the basic information that you have for these elements. Or in other words, you are going to be able to see the textbook that you get when you hover elements such as the walls, which is something that you can use but also using Terp on the keyboard in order to make sure that you're hovering the element that you want. 68. Editing the Grid Using the Properties: Now moving along with the cording walls, you're also going to be able to appreciate the properties that you can change on the properties pallet, which means the ones that you select a cording wall, you're going to be able to modify the properties of the cording wall in order to change the appearance of the cording wall. So you're going to see that now you're able to modify the vertical grid and the horizontal grid when it comes to properties such as the angle, which is something that you can change on the vertical grid and the horizontal grid. Now at the same time, something for you to notice is that any change that you do on the cording wall may affect the structure of the cording wall. And it will let you know if the change is going to add or remove elements to the structure of the cording wall. As you notice, these are properties that you can change on all the types of cording walls. However, you're only going to be able to appreciate these changes if you have more than one panel. If I modify the second type of cording wall, you're going to see that you can change the justification of the cording wall, which is going to change how the grid is placed on the cording wall. Or in other words, you're going to be able to change how the panels are organized on the cording wall as well. You're going to see other properties such as the upset, in order to create an upset based on the justification, which is something that you can verify based on the measure to recommend. Now you can modify these properties as well as the other properties on the properties palette, such as the angles. This means they will be able to modify the coding walls in many different ways. Now something else that is going to change the appearance of the courting wall is the height of the courting wall. So this means that when you design the courting wall, you will need to take into account the height of the courting wall. So this is something else that you need to take into account when placed on a courting wall within your project. 69. Working with Curtain Walls: When creating cording walls. In Revit, you might have noticed that everything is pretty standard, especially because the basic walls are very similar to the cording walls. However, the cording walls have different elements or families. The compost structure of the cording wall. Because of this, you're going to find a few differences when editing the cording wall compared to other elements that you can create on your project. Send this lesson. I'm going to focus how you add the cortin walls, but also a few options or tools that you can use in order to make this a little bit easier. I'm going to create a cortin wall by using the tools circummensed on the tro panel right away. You're going to notice that the tools on the trop panel and the options for are pretty much the same ones that you have on the basic walls. Which means that if you create the cortin walls, you're also going to be able to add the placement and the length of the cortin wall by using, for example, aromatic dimensions. Which also means that you can change the relationship between the cortin wall and other elements that you have in the project. By also using theromatic dimensions also means they're going to be able to use the tool circumands that you have on the modified panel. Which means that you can move, rotate, and copy the Corbin walls by using these tools. If you're not able to see an element of the coring wall, you can simply use thin lines in order to see the elements that make the coring wall a little bit easier. Now what is being said? Something important for you to notice is that when you select the coping walls, you're going to notice that you won't be able to change the properties of the coring wall because Revit is going to select all the elements that make the cording wall. This is something that you can notice on the T selector, but also on the fact that now you have the filter on the modify, you can use the filter in order to change only the properties of the cording wall, which also means that you are going to be able to use the filter in order to select the elements that make the cording wall. Where you're also going to notice that the properties are locked by default because these are elements that make the cording wall which is something that you can notice if you select one of these elements. If you use tap on the keyboard, in any of the views in which you can see the cording wall, that you are going to be able to select specific element of the cord wall. But more importantly that you are going to notice that there is a pin on that element. And the pin, the one that stops you from changing the properties of this element as well. The Pin is also something that can change the way that you select the elements on your project. This is because there is an option that is select elements. With this option you are going to be able to enable or disable the selection of the elements that are pin on the project. If you disable this option, you're going to notice they won't be able to select the elements there are locked by using the pin. Which is actually pro, useful when selecting the Corbin walls because you're only going to select the cording walls instead of the Corbin walls and all the other elements that make the Corbin wall as well. If you have used recent versions of Revit, you might have noticed that when you select the cording walls, you are not able to see all the controls of the Corbin wall. This is because by default these are disabled. Revit will actually allow you to activate controls and dimensions by using independent option or two. If you select the active controls and dimensions using the controls panel or the circuit which is in Apple and Charlie, you are going to see that you will be able to see these controls as long as the option that is called select elements is enabled. This is because these controls are the ones that let you know if an element is pinned on the project. While this option is enabled, you are going to see that you are able to select the cording walls as well as the elements that make the coring wall. But also you are going to be able to see all the controls that are related to those elements. With this, you can see that all the elements that make the cording wall are actually locked by using the pin. Which also means they are going to be able to use the filter in order to see how many elements are actually used in order to create a cording wall, which is also very important because the cording walls will need to be rendered on the open. Which means that all these elements will need to be rendered at the same time. The complexity of the cording walls also affect the performance. What is being said, working with the cording walls remains very easy. However, the complexity of the cording walls lies on these elements that compose the cording wall. 70. Placing a Stair: Now it, you can actually create stairs that you can add to your project in a very simple and also efficient way. If you go to the Architecture tab, you will be able to find the stair to argument. If you use the stair to argument, you're going to see then now you have access to a few panels that you didn't have before, but also options on the options part, as well as the family type on the type selector as well as the properties on the properties paleo. The basic thing that you will need to know about these stairs is how you create them. With this in mind, you will be able to see the components that make the stair and the component that is selected by Defol When you use the stair argument run. Now the run is nothing more than a component that combines that threads and the risers. So because of this, you can actually create a stair by using one single run. Or in another words, you will have a stair with all the risers and threads that is going to need without landings. So you're able to create a stair by using one single run. And once you finish, you just need to click on the green check in order to finish the stair. And the result is a very simple stair with a few notations, but also a representation that will allow you to use it within a floor plan. That's something very important for you to know about the stairs is that the stairs are meant to connect the level in which you draw the stair to the next higher level that you have in your project. And sense on this case template already created two levels. You're going to see that the height of level two will determine the height of the stair. As a quick sign, the riser is composed of threads and risers. What you actually create is actually an assembly of multiple threads and multiple risers. Now, with this been said since right now, just focus on the drawing. I'm also going to show you the fact that you can add a landing to the stair by just simply drawing a few stairs. And then resuming the creation of this stair by just simply creating a few of the risers, which will automatically create the threads. As you notice, the way that you create this section of the stair, in other words, the run is by actually using the left click on the mouse in order to determine where the run is going to start and when the run is going to end. Once this stair has been completed, you are going to see once again, this stair is going to connect two different levels. You will be able to the height of level two in order to change the height of the stair. This is because the stair is composed of runs, landings, and supports. The first option allows you to create a run that can automatically create the landing. However, you can see there are other shapes that you can use that will not create a landing, just for example, this one, which will allow you to create a stair based on a spiral. So this means that you will be able to draw the stair as you are drawing a circle, in the sense that you add the stair based on a radius mas, a quick sinus. The radius is actually based by default, on the center of the run, so in other words, is going to be from the center to have the width of the thread or the riser. And also by determining what the left click on the mouse where this stair is going to begin. But also as you notice, you won't be able to determine where this stair is going to end. This is a shape that will use a circle in order to create the amount of threads and risers required in order to get from one level to another. Now what is being said? There is another one that works pretty much the same way. However, with this one, you will have control where the component is going to begin and where the component is going to end. This one will allow you to pretty much do the same thing based on a radius. However, you're going to see that you're not able to create an stair that is going to connect one level with the other if it needs to have a run on top of the other. Now, this is something that you can do manually. However, it takes a little bit of practice in order to do this, right. In this case, I'm not going to go much into this because at this point I just want to show you how you control the stairs by just simply using the components. This is because as you notice, you will actually need to use the two circumens that you have on the modified panel as well as the controls that you have available on the stair. Now, with this in mind, you're going to see that you have controls that you can use in order to extend or extend the run, which is actually different than what you can do with the previous one. Because the previous is actually able to create an stair that is going to connect both levels instead of just a segment. Now in this case, I'm just going to the lead this run in order to show you how you can create a run. Why is in a different shape. Now this one is also a component that places the stair already using specific shape. Now as a quick sin while placing or drawing the run, you are going to see that you will have a number that will let you know. How many razors or in other words, how many traits have you created through this? Revit will let you know how many risers you still need in order to complete this stair. Which Rosa means that Revit is also going to use this number in order to let you know. If we're editing the stair, this stair is going to have more risers than it actually needs. So what this means, I'm just going to erase this stair in order to create a stair just simply using the next shape on the component panel. Now this one is also a component that places the stair already using specific shape. So as you notice, you have a basic shape that uses the line to orguen in order to create the stairs, while at the same time you have other shapes that you can use in order to create the runs for the stairs. Or in other words, that will allow you to create runs that are very specific or for very specific parts of your project. As a quick signer, you can edit the stair while this stairs still selected or after selecting the stair by just collecting where it says edit the stair as well. Something that you're going to see throughout this license is that stair is actually the sum of the runs, the landings, and the support. However, there is another family system that is added to the stairs at the moment that you create the stairs, and this one is the railings throughout this license, I'm going to show you how you can create the stairs, but also how can you place and edit the different components that make this stair while the railings are going to have their own section. Up to this point, you can notice that the stairs are very easy to create, especially because of the different shapes they are able to use. The runs where they are based on the line, the art, or standard shapes such as shape or a new shape. 71. Stair Components (The Runs): When creating the stairs, you are going to notice that the stairs are created by a combination of multiple components. And the, some of these components are created automatically while creating the stair or after creating this stair. However, the functionality of the stair remains pretty much the same. Which means that the stair will need to comply with the number of threads or risers that he needs in order to connect the levels at the bottom and at the end of the stair. However, you are also going to see that you can edit the stair before finishing the stair. Pacing the controls with the stair that is created, pacing the default settings, other words, rating the stair using the straight run. You are going to notice that you have to controls at the end of the run or stair. Now one of the controls will allow you to add threads or risers to the stair. Which is something that you can see not only because of the appearance of the stair, but also because of the properties as well. You're going to see that there is another control that will actually displace this stair. Now this control is a little bit different because this one actually changes the position of the stair. This is the reason why this stair begins at one. Even though the placement of the stair has changed depending on the controls, the use, you're going to see change on the properties and as who you're going to notice the pot of the controls are available at the start of the run or the stair. However, you are going to notice that the controls will modify the stair depending on what you want to do with the stair. This is because Ravid is not going to allow you to add more threads or risers at the beginning of this stair. Which is something that you can notice because of the fact that Ravi displays additional threads or risers on this stair with a plus sign. This means that it's not able to add threads or risers from the negative direction. Ravi is going to display a message if you try to do it Now what is being said? You are going to be able to see a little bit better how these controls actually change the stair by views such as the elevations and the sections. If I use the controls once again, you are going to notice that even though I'm not able to add on a negative direction and actually able to remove threads or rises at the beginning of the run or stair. With this in mind, you can notice that editing the stair is actually very easy if you're using the controls. However, you're going to notice that the controls that you have are going to depend on the segment that you're using, but also that you can use different runs in order to finish a stair. This means that you can create different designs by just simply using different type of segments, or in another words, different type of runs. But also you are going to see that you're able to use references that you may already have in your project in order to create the stair. This means that you can use as a reference the elements that you already created in order to finish a stair. Additionally, is going to create an automatic landing in order to connect the runs. You won't have to create the landing if you don't want it. However, the stairs that you can create are also going to be determined by the segments that you want to use. This is because some of the segments that you might want to use will not connect one with the other. Depending on the stair that you're creating, you are going to see that B is going to create a landing in order to connect to runs, while another one will simply store stir. This is the reason why those segments and start from when you're not going to see an automatic landing or a continuation of the previous segment on those cases. The best example for this is the U shape, because the U shape allows you to create a stair just based on the segment. If you create a stair by using this segment, you're going to see the controls at the store and at the end of the run, just like another. Which means that you can extend by using these controls. But also you are going to notice that there are other controls that will allow you to do something different. If you use the controls that appear in color red, you are going to notice that you will be able to add the shape of the run. And this is because this run type is actually meant to be used in order to create a stair by using just one segment. It will be a little bit more complex. It will be easier to use in cases in which you will use this type of design. Now, this doesn't mean that you cannot add more complexity to a stair facing the segments. There are different options that will allow you to add more complexity. Not only to the segments but also the sign of the stairs. Mainly because the options that you can use in order to create landings and also the runs with the assistance of other tools or comments. As you can notice, the stairs are very easy to use. And especially because B actually creates the basic elements that the stair is going to need, B is going to create the stairs already with elements such as the runs, the landings, the supports, and the railings. 72. Stair Properties: Now once you already created this stair, you're going to sit there on the properties. You will actually have properties that you can change right away, such as, for example, the base level as well as the top level. Which means that you will be able to change the level in which the stair is going to end as well. You will be able to add an upset that will determine if this tear is going to end before connecting to the level, or if it's going to end after connecting to the level. Or in other words, depending on the value, you're going to get a different result. And these properties are going to remain regardless of the level that you want to connect by using this tear. So with this in mind, you will be able to use the levels or an upset in order to determine the height of the stair at the same time. Something for you to know is the revit will actually calculate the stair for you. Which means that will take into account the height as well as the risers that you want to use. So this means that it will take the high and then it will divide the height between the number of risers that you want to use in order to give you the actual height of the riser. So with this means, you will need to know how many risers do you want, or in another words, the height that this stair is going to have once it's completed. Perros, since you're able to add this stair, you will be able to use the tools that you have on a modified panel in order to add additional runs to the stair. Or something for you to keep in mind is where the stair is actually going to begin. So something that you can actually do is actually use the direction of the stair in order to make a few things a little bit easier. If, for example, I changed the direction and then I just simply draw another run for this stair. You're going to see the bit will automatically create the landing in order to finish the stair. With this being said, once the stair has been created, you can change the direction or you can keep editing the stair. But more importantly, as you notice, I actually added a number of stairs that were needed in order to connect the two levels without changing so much the height of the riser. Now you can actually change the desired number of risers or something for you to notice is that bit will let you know that it's not actually able to connect one level with the other. When this happens bit will actually try to accommodate the stair by actually changing the actual riser height. So this in mind you can change the desired number of risers, but this doesn't mean that it's not going to change the actual number of risers. What bit will try to do is actually try to compensate by adjusting the actual riser height. What this means is that you can actually use the desired number of risers in order for you to get an idea of how many risers do you need on a particular stair in order for you to get a specific riser height? So this is something that you can use in order to test the values that you want to use for this stair. So these properties are pretty useful when changing the values that you actually need in order to define this stair. So you can keep editing the stair by changing, for example, the levels that you're using in order to do most of the work, but also in order to help you know if you are using the amount of risers that you're going to need. Now with this in mind, you are also going to be able to see that on the properties palette you actually have the tread that go. In other words the space for these steps, the panel conto region. You may actually need to have the front values or the thread, which actually can become very important because of the size of the field of the end user. Now with this being said, since you have an upset for the top level, you're also going to have an upset for the base level. And something for you to notice is that the base and the top upset are going to change the hydro stair. Which means that this also modifies the Rasor height. Because as I mentioned before, the rasor height will take into account the hydros stair and the risers of the stair. But more specifically, as you notice the desire number of risers. Now with this being said, a few changes are going to come with a warning because Revit will actually let you know if a few of these changes might actually affect the efficiency of the stair or in other words, if this stair is actually useful. Now once you finish the stair, another way in which you can actually the number of risers that you might want to use or in other words, how this stair is going to be created in space and controls that you have on this stair. So while editing this stair, you're going to see that you will have controls. They will actually change the number of risers that you have on this stair, but also you're going to see that you will have another control that's just going to change the appearance of the stair. This means that you will be able to determine exactly where the stair is going to begin without actually changing the number of risers that you're going to use. So with this in mind, you will be able to edit this stair in order to have the number of risers that you actually need to have. Or in another words, in order to have the same number of risers that you have. Where it says desired number of risers. So this means that every time you change this value to a different number than the one that you have and the actual number of risers, you're going to get a warning from Revit. Revit is always going to let you know if the values that you want to use are actually the values that you're using. With this in mind, you're going to be able to create a stair based on your needs. But more importantly that you can still edit a little bit more when it comes to the levels, but also when it comes to the amount of risers. All this means that creating and editing a stair is actually easy if you're creating a simple stair, or in another words, without going in some of the advanced options. And I'm also going to show you throughout these lessons. 73. Run Properties: In that sense, you create this stair by using different components. You're actually going to see that before finishing a stair, you're going to be able to select the different components that you're using this stair. In order to change the properties and the properties palette, you can actually see how the location line will actually affect the way that you control the stair. You're going to be able to change the property location line in order to change how to justify this component of this stair relative to the other components that you can add to this stair. Which is the reason why you're able to select among the supports or more specifically, you're able to choose exterior support right and exterior support left as a quick sin. These options are very similar to the options that you have when justifying the position of other elements or family systems. With this in mind, you're going to be able to change at any point, the location line, the location line, as well as the relative base height, but also the relative top height, which is actually going to change the run height. While at the same time, these are not going to change the properties of this stair, such as the thread and the risers as a quick sinus. You can actually change these values by also using the controls that you see above ends of the run. Or in other words, the position of the controls within this stair relative to the run, which even take into account the supports that you can add to the stair. And this means that every time that you change the pales, you're also going to see a change on the extension of the supports. The supports of the stairs are the ones that you are going to see by default up both sides of the run. On this view, you will be able to see the supports as the element that is behind the threads and risers. For you to notice is that these Pals are meant to be used relative to the levels. Which means the sense is stair is placed based on the levels. You don't actually need to use negative values at the same time you're going to find there are a few properties that will allow you to determine how you're going to construct this stair. Which means that you are able to select extend below riser base, which will allow you to extend the run below the riser. Which also means that you can change this value in order to add a separation between the base and the riser. At the same time, you can select if you want the run to begin with the riser, but also if you want the run to end with the riser as a quick sin. In order to appreciate the changes that you do to run, you're actually able to change the visual style that you're using within a view, but also you're able to change the detail level as well. You're going to be able to change the dimensions by changing the wave, or more specifically, by changing the wave of the run. With this in mind, you're going to be able to notice that you can even change the way that the run is going to be constructed. But also you are going to be able to see how changing the properties actually affects the stair, which is very important because in some cases, these properties are what you're going to need in order to make this stir the way that you want within your project. All of this is being said. You're also going to notice that you can edit the run by also using the tomatic dimensions. How are you going to see that one of these atomatic dimensions only display the length of the run? Which means that you won't be able to change the length of the run by using the atomatic dimension as well. You're also going to notice that a few of these values cannot be changed, even if they are in color blue. All of this is being said. You can notice that the runs are easy to use. However, there is a lot of things that you can do that this tear of your project, all of this might be a little bit confusing of course. 74. Stair Components (The Landings and The Supports): Now I'm just going to show you the other component that you can use when creating a stair, which is the landing. I'm going to show you how you can create a landing when creating a stair. Now, the landing can be created automatically. When you have two runs, they're actually continuing the same sequence. This means that if you don't finish the run automatically, rabbits going to place a landing between two runs. However, if you delete the landing in order to reposition the run, you can place the landing automatically by using this suption on the components panel or more specifically, by using dissuption when creating the stair. What this means is that if you select the landing, you're going to have the options that you can use in order to create the landing. The basic option that you have in order to create the landing requires for you to select two different runs. Which means that you will need to create first that the runs that you want to connect by using the landing. This one will be useful when you're editing the runs that you want to use on the stair or in other words, when you create a stair and then you delete the landing because you want to change the position of the runs. And this is because in most cases you will be using the run that is actually created by Deft when you're creating this stair as well. Something for you to know is that the landing can only be created if the two runs actually has a space, the landing, which means that the two runs will need to be able to continue the path of the stair. Now at the same time, something that you're going to notice is that if you change the run, you are also going to change the landing. But also you are going to be able to see that the landing as such will also have properties on the properties palette that you can use in order to the position of the landing. Which in return is going to add this stairs A quick sign. Something that you can notice is you're also going to have a few controls that will allow you to the landing. However, you're also going to see that the controls will only change the beginning and the end of the runs. Additionally, you cannot use all these controls if the landing is already connecting that to runs. But as well, there is another way in which you can actually create the landing, which is a little bit less intuitive because you will actually use a tool circumens that you have on the row panel in order to draw the landing. So this being said, what you're actually going to draw is the bounder of the landing. However, you will need to keep in mind that the landing on these cases are automatically connecting to runs. So you will need to make sure that the landing is actually on the right position in order to join that runs, while at the same time, you are also going to need to keep in mind that even when drawing the landing, you will need to keep the other components of this stair working together as well. You're going to see that the landing will connect, the two runs automatically if you know the value that you need to use on the relative high or if you add the landing by using the tools on the modified panel, which means they are going to be able to add the placement of the landing, but also the sketch of the landing. If you addit the sketch of the landing based on the runs they already created on the project, you're going to see that the landing is going to connect the two runs automatically. Which means that these landings are going to even change where the runs will store and end without changing the levels that they are going to connect. And as a quick signer, once I created this stair, you're going to see once again that the components that make this stair are going to be created automatically, which means that the supports are also going to be created along with the stair and the railings, which also means that you will also have the supports on the components panel of the stair. You can delete the support in order to place a new one, or you're going to see throughout this lessons that this family type actually creates the supports by Defoe. There are other family types that you can actually use in order to create a stair that don't create by Deft. How those family types are not really intended or use in order to use supports and in order for you to see which support is being added, but also in order for you to see which properties do you have when it comes to the support, you just need to use step on the keyboard until you are able to select the support or in another words, the stringer. So with this in mind, you're going to be able to change the properties of the stringer while selecting the stringer. So all of this will allow you to actually edit this stair without actually worrying about the project in which are placing this stair. Which also means that in many cases you won't need to worry so much about actually having to create your component moral in place just for the stairs. However, you might have to create some families or components for a specific project. 75. Multistory Stair: And since you can create a stair in order to connect to levels within your project, you are going to see that you actually have an option in order to connect multiple levels by using as a reference or as an instance the Stat you're creating. So with this you're going to be able to create a multistory stair. So by clicking where it says connect levels, you are going to open this window. In case you are not able to see the levels there, you can connect to the stair. Because in this case, you will actually need to select the level by using an elevation, a section, or any view in which you have the notation for the level. And at the same time, something for you to notice is that the stair is going to use the stair. What's going to be created before you use the option or to or commend? That allows you to connect the levels. Which means that if you change the hydro, the level, this air is going to try to connect the levels towards selected. By creating the components that is going to need in order to connect to the next level. Depending on what you have before you click where says connect the stairs, which also means that you can always change the hydro levels, but at the same time that you're going to be able to add more levels to this stair. Once you have a multistory stair, you're going to be able to col where it says connect or disconnect levels. In order to disconnect a level, but also in order to connect multiple levels to the same stair is in mind. You're going to be able to select the levels as you normally would in order to finish your selection as a quick signer. Once they use this stair on multiple levels, you won't be able to edit this stair as you normally would. Which means that the option that is called edit the stair will be gray out. This is because this is not a stair that is just in place on multiple levels. As you notice, creating a stir for multiple levels at the same time is actually Es, but also very practical because we can actually add these stairs while also deciding which levels we want to connect. 76. The Openings: On this part of the course, I'm going to show you how you can create the openings. Starting first with the opening that is opening by face. As the name implies, opening by face allows you to create an opening on the face of an element. This means that you will select the face of the element in which you can place this opening. And then you will be able to use the tools, circuments that you have on the T panel in order to create the opening. But also you're going to see that you can move the opening within the element in which you place the opening. This opening is going to modify the element depending on the position of the opening on the element. Now, the next opening that you have is called the chef opening. If you use the chef opening, you're going to be able to see that you have similar properties to the walls in order to define where this opening is going to store and where this opening is going to end. Now this opening has a few limitations because it's not able to create an opening in all the elements that you can create within your project. You will need to take this into account when creating the openings, because you will be able to use this opening. But also you will need to edit the elements that are not affected by the opening, as well as the notice about this opening. Instead, this opening has some similarities to family systems such as the walls. So you're going to be able to use the level as a reference for more precision or control of this opening. However, you're also going to see a value that is unconnected height. This value is grayed out because it's only there in order to provide you the height of the opening regardless of the position of the opening on the project. While at the same time, since you're using the tools cumans that you have on the panel, you're going to be able to use these tools not only in order to add the boundary of the chef, but also the symbolic line that is created for the chef. This symbolic line is made of the detail lines that you can create in your project in order to help you with the representation of the chef within your project. Well, there is another opening that is called wall opening that will allow you to create an opening on the walls of the project. Now this one works very similar to the walls because you're going to be able to define the height of the opening as well as the base of the opening. But also something for you to notice. It says that you're able to place the opening on the walls of the project. You're also going to be able to place an opening on the courting walls. Which also means that you can use this regardless of the family type. While editing this opening. You're going to notice that you can use not only the romatic dimensions in order to it the openings, but also the properties with the openings. You're also going to have properties such as the base constraint and the top constraint. Which means that you can also change the top upset and the base upset. This also means you're going to find once again the unconnected hive on the properties. Now there is another opening. The words pretty much the same way as opening by phase. However, the opening is going to be created like a shaft. Which means that regardless of the orientation of the element or phase that you're selecting, the direction of the opening will be vertical. But as the opening by phase, you're going to be able to move this opening anywhere within the element. Which means that the position of the opening will actually determine how this opening is going to affect the element. Now as a quick signo, if you have any issue selecting the opening, you can always use tap on the keyboard in order to select the opening. All of that being said, you are going to see that these openings are easy to use. But also you will be able to combine these properties in order to red project based on your design. 77. Dormer Opening: As well. There is another opening that you can use in order to help you with the dormers. However, this one is going to be a little bit trickier because you will need elements like this one. Which means that you will need to make sure that there are walls that connect with the roofs or otherwise, you're not going to be able to use this opening with this in mind, I'm going to use this opening after editing the walls that are created on the project. But also I'm going to use the joint roof to or in order to it the roofs. As a quick sign, you actually need to edit the roofs and the walls because the dormer to Oren actually need to use this as a reference when creating the boundary of the dormer. In other words, this is the only opening in which you don't draw a boundary. After editing this roof and also the walls, I'm going to use once again the dormer to command in order to create an opening based on the elements that are joined together. And once that I have done this, you're going to see that the dormer has been created within the roof as well as for you to notice is that you don't actually need to connect the lines that make the boundary. However, you're still able to add the elements within the boundary of the dormer as well as the boundary of the dormer. However, you select the dormer and then you select re says opening. You are going to see that the boundary was connected automatically. Which means they don't actually need to worry about connecting the boundaries unless you get an error after selecting the green check. 78. Placing a Ramp: Now when working on your project, you might need to create a Ram in Revit. You can create a Ram by using the Ram to commend on the architectural tab. And once they use this to recommend, you're going to notice that you will be able to draw the components of the Ram. Meaning that you will have a draw panel on the modified tab that you have after using the Ram to recommend. Even though you're creating a sketch, you're going to be able to draw this sketch like your draw a component on the stairs. This means that bit will create the boundaries and the risers automatically. So what bit actually creates is the Ram a sketch by either drawing a run, like you can draw a component on the stairs, or you can either draw the boundaries and the risers. And this also means that you can finish the Ram in a single join, or you can create the Ram one part at a time. This means that you can even combine the different ways in order to create a M as well as something they are going to notice is that when you create a Ram with multiple segments, the second segment is going to continue right after the first one. Which means that the values that you see close to the Ram are going to change in order to let you know how much is remaining. However, on these lessons, I'm also going to show you why these segments will not be able to continue until it says see remaining. With this in mind, you're going to see that the elements that make the Ram works very similar to the stairs. And you can see this because of the controls and the properties that you have when working with the Ram. Now at the same time, since this is a sketch, you can always select the Ram in order to collect. It says edit a sketch. And you can always finish the sketch by clicking on the green check. A Ram is actually pretty easy to create with Rave. Now what is being said? You can actually draw a Ram with more than one loop. Our something for you to notice is that if you create a Ram with multiple segments, revit is going to create a landing every two segments. Which means that fit is going to automatically create the landings of the Ram based on the amount of segments of the Ram. This is very important for you to keep in mind when creating your project because as you can see, the Rams are very useful in parking buildings or in other words, in buildings they create just for parking over. Something that you will notice is that the railings might have some issues when working with Rams. They have more than one loop. This is important for you to notice, because you might want to create the Rams with railings, but you might also want to create the Rams without the railings. But also since these Rams are also based on levels, the levels can actually determine the slope of the Ram without changing the sketch of the M on the Rams. The properties are more important than the stairs, because within the properties of the Ram, you are going to be able to see how much distance you actually need in order to connect one level with the other based on the slope that you assign to the Rams. 79. Ramp Properties: Now since the properties on the Rams are actually very important, you are going to be able to notice that when you draw the Ram, you are going to be able to see a text that will let you know the exact distance that you are creating or in other words, the length of the segment. But it will also let you know how much more lend you need to create in order to connect one level with the other. Revit actually tries to help you by letting you know how much do you need based on the values that you have on the properties. This is something that is going to extend to the warnings that you get when changing the constraints because Revit will let you know if the Ram doesn't have the values that he needs in order to connect one level with the other. Now at the same time, there are some values that are going to change the Ram, such as, for example, the width. However, since the Rams are very similar to the stairs, the width is actually going to change what is considered the Ram, but not the landing. You will need to keep this in mind when editing the Ram that you create for your project. With this in mind, you can always add this sketch, while at the same time you can change other properties, such as, for example, the graphics. Which means that you can change properties such as the up label, the properties for the arrow and the text, while at the same time when you create multiple types of Rams, you're going to be able to use the type selector in order to change the family type. Also the properties they have on the properties for the family type that you're using. 80. Ramp Components: When you create a Ram and Vet, you are going to notice that there is a default value that is already assigned to the run. Which means that if you create a run, the run is only going to extend based on that value. Now that value is actually determined by the family type. However, you don't actually have to change the family type in order to extend the run. This is because the run is actually created by using lines. Because of this, you will be able to add the lines that I use in order to add the run. However, the sketch that is used on the run does not actually change the length as such. In order to actually change the extent of the run, you will need to make sure that you are also editing the path of the run. In other words, you will need to add the extent of this blue line. You are going to notice that if I do this, the run is going to change as well as the values that I use in order to let you know that the land is going to connect to its destination or target as well. You are going to notice that you can actually create the Ram by drawing the sketch of the ramp. Which means that you will be able to create the boundaries as well as the risers. Worse, something for you to notice is that even though this is very similar to the stairs, you're not going to be drawing the path of the ramp. This is because the ramp will actually create the elements that are needed for the ramp based on the properties of the family type. Once they created this sketch, you can simply use the green check in order to see the result. That's what you're going to notice. That bit is going to let you know if there are any errors that you will need to get the mind. As, for example, the use of the boundary lines instead of the risers as a big sin. You can use the automatic dimensions in order to the sketch of the Ram a little bit easier. Regardless of the way in which you create the Ram, you're also going to see that the controls remain the same, which means that you can change the direction of the Ram by just simply using this control. Additionally, since you can create this sketch of the Ram, you're also going to notice that you can create a Ram with multiple segments and multiple shapes. Which means that you can create a Ram for different projects or areas of the project. However, the second segment of this sketch is still going to be considered, the landing, which means that the design of the ramp and still use the landings. But more importantly that if you don't want to create a landing, you will need to make sure that the design is actually adjusted for that as well. Meaning that you can even divide your design the same way that you do with the stairs. Or in other words, they can create landings in order to connect the segments that you want in the ramp. Which also means they can create a very complex ramp two segments at a time in order to avoid creating a landing. 81. Editing the Family Type (Ramp): Now when working with the Rams, you will need to know how to change the slope of the Rams. How to use the properties on the properties palette is being said. I'm going to create a Ram that I can use in order to show you the properties that you can change based on the types window. While at the same time I'm going to be able to use this Ram in order to show you how to work with the slopes. Once I created the Ram, I'm just going to select it. And then I'm going to open the types window. Now the types window, you will be able to find the family system that is being used in order to create the Ram, as well as the family type. Perso you will find the standard options in order to duplicate the family type, as well as the option in order to rename the family type. I'm going to create a new family type in order to avoid making any changes to an existing family type. Then I'm going to show you the first property which is called shape. This one will allow you to change the shape of the Ram based on the thickness of the Ram. Or by just simply using the base level and this slope of the Ram in order to create a solid. If you use the solid shape, you won't be able to change the thickness. However, you will be able to change the function, which once again, is pretty useful when working with the schedules, but also in order to define where the Ram is going to be used. And at the same time, you're able to change the graphics which are used for the annotations of the Ram. In other words, for the text that is created. Once you place the Ram, the basic properties are going to be based on the construction as well as the graphics. As a quick signer, you can still use control C in order to undo the changes. So I'm just going to use control C before opening. Once again the type of window, However, you will notice they are also going to be able to change the material they are going to use for the Ram by changing the material through the use of the material browser window. And now when it comes to the slope, you will first need to know what are the dimensions that you can use on this slope. This means that the dimensions you will be able to change, the maximum inclined len and the ram max slope. The maximum inclined len is pretty much the length of the ramp that you can create in one single run. How you're going to notice is that this value is not going to change an existing ramp, which means that this value is going to apply when creating a new ramp that is using the same family type. If you change this value, you are going to be able to notice that you can create a run based on the value that you input on the maximum inclined length. However, you're going to see that this is not going to change the reach of the Ram. Or in another words, how high the m is going to go. You're going to be able to change this value without having to worry about this slope. As long as the maximum inclined length is longer than the lend that you would need in order to create the Ram based on this slope. This slope as such is going to be determined by this value that you use on the max slope. With this mining parenthesis, you're going to have the number one divided between a value. What this means is that you will have the number one below the x will be replaced by the value of your choosing. By default, you have 12 as the value, which means that one is going to be divided by 12. The percentage this low is going to be a little bit higher of 8% but a smaller of 8.5 which means that you're going to get low, pretty much 8% However, this is a value that you can change in order to modify this low. In other words, instead of having this high, requiring this land, you're going to have a different height in order to reach this height, or in another words, the next level. In order to make this easier to understand, I'm going to use the method that is used on the roof, which means that I'm going to change the length of the Ram to 1 meter so you can actually see the value of this low based on the measurement to recommend. As you notice, the value that you can see is the same when you're going to get by dividing the number one between the value of the property. If you change this value to, for example, ten, you are going to see that now the height is going to be based on a slope of 10% Now this might be confusing because of the units. In order to show you this a little bit better, I'm just going to change the project units to meters. This also means that you can change the project units to the units that you use in your country region in order for you to see the result based on the units that you use for your projects. After this, you're going to see that if I use the measure two command, the result is going to be very much the same by using different units. So what is being said? You are going to be able to always change the unit in order for you to see the result based on the units that you use on your country region. But also you can use this value as a reference if you use in your control region and a slope of 10% Well, if you use a value close to 8% you just need to use 12 or the value that you need in order to reach this value or any other value with a little bit more precision. Which is going to be easier to do because you can actually do this in reverse, which means that you can use the value that you want to use for this slope and then multiply for a value that is going to give you as a result, one. Or a value close as possible to one. However, once again, you can simply use these values as a reference in order for you to get a result close to what you're looking for. While edit enders Ram, you're also going to notice that the Ram is not going to change the level that is going to reach as long as the land and this low allows the Ram to reach that top level. As a quick sign, if you change the top level to none, you are going to see that the height of the Ram is going to change. This is because the Ram changes from the pales that you have on the top of this window to the same deal that is used on the length of the ramp. With all this being said, you can always use the maximum inclined length as a limited for the runs. Or in other words, you will be able to limit the length of the runs based on your project, while at the same time you're going to use the Ram max slow in order to determine the slope of the M. But also if you change the length of the M, then the length of the M will actually determine how much of the you're going to create because this load that you select is the maximum value for this low that is allowed when creating the M. This is important as well for you to notice, because even though you can create Rams for people, you are going to be able to also create ramps for cars. So you might need to change the law based on vehicles, as well as people. 82. Placing a Railing: Now the following lessons when going to show you how to work with the railings. That the railings, as you might have noticed, are automatically created when you create a stair and also when you create the ramp. Because of this, the easiest way in order for you to see a railing is by actually creating either a stair or a ramp. Once that these elements are created, you are going to be able to see properties on the property is palette while the railing is selected. But also you are going to be able to see that on the architectural tab, you actually have a two or command that is called railing. Put this on mine, you can create a railing by either sketching a path or by placing the railing on a stair or a ramp. Now, the second option is done automatically when you create a stair or a ram, and is automatically placed on the stair or the ram. So the first option is the one that you actually use in order to create a railing without a host or in another words, without the need or any of those elements. Which means that you will need to create first a stair or a ram in order to create this railing. And something as well for you to notice is that you will have access to the tools or commands that you have, the row panel, in order to draw the path of the railing. However, you are going to see the options on the options for related to the tool or command they are using on the raw panel. However, the properties on the properties palette will remain the same. Drawing the pad and after drawing the pad, which means that after clicking on the green check, you will have the same properties on the properties let, but also if you select the railing, you will have access to the same properties. Now, what is being said? You will have a few options in order to work with the railings while drawing the railings. And some of these options are going to be fairly standard. You are going to be able to see the options or tools, comments that you have on the board plane, but also you are going to see you are able to pick a new hot as well as the joints and an option for preview which will allow you to see the railing based on the properties that are being used on the railing. Before even clicking on the green check our something for you to notice is they are going to be able to see the preview as long as the preview is enabled before joining the pattern the railing. As you notice, rating a railing is actually pre, easy if there is nothing specific that you actually need to do while placing the railing or after placing the railing. 83. Adding Railings to Existing Elements: When you create a stair or a ramp for the first time, you're going to notice that by depo Bit is going to add the railings. These railings are going to be place based on how you created the stair or the ramp. Which means that it is going to place a railing following the different elements and make this stair or the ramp, which is pretty useful because you can actually use this in order to place the railings. Once again, if I delete this railings, you are going to see that I can use the option that is called place on a stair or Ram in order to place railings on this stair. While doing this you are going to see that you have a panel that is co position. This panel you're going to find two options. One that is called threads and the other one is called stringer. Now the first option will allow you to place a railing based on the threads of the stair. Which means that it's going to place the railing on top of the treads as what you're going to see. That you cannot use these options in order to place a railing on only one side of the stair. Which means that if you use the threads or the stringer, you will need to make sure that there is not a railing already on the stair or the M. After deleting this railing, I can place a railing by in the stringers. In the case of the stringers, you are going to note that the railings are placed on top of the stringers of the stair. As you notice, both the disruptions are going to have a different result on the stairs. However, on the Rams, both the dissuptions are going to function very much the same. This is because the Rams are actually use stringers, which means that you won't see any real difference between using ideal dissuptions as well. You are going to see that there is another way in which you can place the railings on elements that you already created for your project. In order to show you this, I'm going to create a floor on this project. After I have done this, I'm going to create another railing by using the options that I have used before. Which means that I'm going to use once again place on in order to place a railing on this element. And after doing this, I'm just going to select the railing. And after selecting the railing, you are going to notice that there is an option on the modified panel that is called Big New Host. As you remember, Big New Hose allows you to change the host of an element that you already created in the case of the railings. It actually allows you to select among the different elements that you can use as a hot for the railings. Which means they will also need to make sure that the element you're selecting can actually be used as a hot for the railings. That's well, you're going to see that this option will actually allow you to do the same thing. Railings that you're creating based on a sketch or in other words, you can use this with the railing that is created after selecting the option that is called a sketch. Which means that you can create a railing of your choosing and then just simply use pick new host in order to change the host at the railing. But also something else that you're going to see is that you can use pick new host while creating or editing the railing. Which means that you can change the hot after selecting what it says, edit the sketch or while rating on your railing. All of this is being said, You're going to see that creating the railings is pretty easy. But also you can still decide where you want to place the railings. Regardless of the way in which you create the railings. All of this is going to be useful, especially when editing your project. 84. Railing Properties: Now going back to the changes that you can do while working with the railings. You're going to be able to see that you can use the relationship between the railing and the host, which means you're going to be able to change the base level for the railing. Per also, you will be able to change the value of the base offset as well as the offset from path. With this in mind, you're going to be able to change a few properties on the properties in order for you to modify the placement of the railing as a quick sin. You're also going to notice that there is a property that is grayed out and this one is called Lend. The lend is grayed out because you're not able to change the length of the railing after creating the railing. However, this is something that you cannot change on a railing that is actually placed by default on a stair or a ram. Once you created the stair or the ram, the only property that you will be able to change with railings such as this one is subset from pad, but this one apply if you use place some stair or ramp as well as for you is able to use postive values as well as negative values on this property. With all of this is being said, you are going to see that the properties are going to depend on how you place the railing, which is the reason why you need to take into account, if you are growing to grave elements such as the stairs with the railings, how are you going to notice that the properties are changed pretty much the same way in other elements? Which means that you can also change the properties of the family pretty much the same way. 85. Rail Structure (Non Continuos): Now when you work on the railings, you're going to notice that the railings are composed of different elements or families that work together. If you select one of the railings and you open the type properties window, you're going to sit there on the type properties window. You will be able to edit the railing structure non continuous, and the baluster placement, what this means is that every time that you create a railing where you're actually placing a rails and balusors that compose the railing, but also there is going to be a top rail and other elements that can also be added to the railings. So with this in mind, I'm going to enable the preview so you can see the changes that you can do when editing the railings. I'm going to start with the railing structure, none continues. After I click recess added, I'm going to be able to actually add additional rails to the railing. So with this in mind, you are going to be able to see the family as well as the family type, but also every time the order railing, you will find the number which represents the order of the railing as well as standard options in order to duplicate and delete. Now we're working with the rails, you are going to be able to change the name as well as the hide, the upset, the profile and the Ma, which means that you will be editing the type propers window for each of the rails. Now with this in mind, you can just simply change the values in order to change the position of the rail, but also in order to change the relationship between the rail and the balusters, which is actually going to be based on the line that is used in order to place the railings, which is by default at the center of the railing. The center of the railing is the one that is being used as a reference when it comes to the upset while the hide uses as a reference the placement or hose that is being used in order to place the railing as you can also change the order of the rails by using O down. With this in mind, you can place multiple instances of the railings, but also you will be able to change the properties individually in order to have different railings with different profiles and even different materials. If you click Was Material, you're going to be able to open the material browser in order to select the material that you want to use for each of the railings. As you notice, changing the structure of the rails is actually pretty easy, but at the same time, you can easily see the changes thanks to the preview. 86. Placing the Components (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this part of the course, I'm going to continue with this project by adding the basic components they use on every project. Which means that I'm going to add the doors and the windows. In order to do this, I'm going to use the door to recommend in order to place a door on the project. After placing this do, I'm going to add the family type based on the values that this family is going to use. I'm going to select this family type and then I'm going to re this family type. However, I'm not going to change the values of this family type. This is because this values are the values I'm going to be using our derfting. Notice at the pauses is that these pauses are actually based on the panel, which means that the actual width and hind are actually the sum of the panel and the frame, which is the reason why selected this name as well. I'm going to keep using this family type on this other part of the project. I'm going to place this family type also on this wall. After doing this, I'm going to place other doors on the project. However, I'm going to use a different family type. This is because this family type will be used on the inter of the project, but also because I'm going to say the other family type. Which means that I need these family types to be independent, one from the other. As a quick signer, you're going to notice once again that this family also uses the panel in order to determine the properties. Which means that the width and height of this too is the panel plus the frame. So when just going to finish editing this family type in order to place the same family type on the next floor after place in this family and also going to cut of the family can place on certain areas of the project. And this is because of the areas of the project I actually need to use that the same width as the doors they already place as well. I'm going to low other families to this project because none other families that are going to need a value on this template. I'm going to be using once again the door to recommend. However, I'm going to use the type properties window in order to low a family from the library as well. You're going to notice that I'm only going to select one of the family types. This is because I'm going to create the family types that I'm going to be using from this family. After loaning this family, I'm going to add other properties on this window before closing this window as well. You're going to see once again that the values of this property are going to be based on the panels. In this case, you are going to be able to see the values that you get a the panels and the frames. This family is a little bit different from the one that I've been using. After adding these doors, you're also going to notice that you can actually change the family tie that you're using on doors you already placed on the project. Which means that you can update the project at any point with your own families. Then I'm going to change the family tie that is being used on another door. And we're doing this, you're going to notice how is it is to add at the family type, as well as adding additional families. After placing the doors of this project, I'm going to start with the windows. Now, placing the windows of this project is going to be pretty much the same. This is because the windows have their own tool on the build panel. Because you can use the type properties window in order to select different families, but also in order to create family types. With this in mind, I'm going to create a new family type on this elevation. After doing this, I'm just going to make sure that the him is actually based on the placement that is supposed to have on the project. We chose a means that I'm going to make sure that the window is also placed by, as a reference, this wall. This is because these windows are going to be at the center of this wall, I suppose, is that these windows might not recognize the host that you want to use. So you will be able to select the window and then use big primary hosts in order to select the right host for the window. As you notice, working with the windows is pretty much the same thing as working with the doors. However, with the windows, the one advice that I can give you is to actually place the windows based on the elevations as much as the floor plans. This is because elevations allows you to see where these windows are actually placed on the project. So because of this, I'm going to open another elevation that I can use in order to place my windows. As a quick signer, you can use as a reference the automatic dimensions, but also you can use existing elements as a reference in order to do the same. So in this case, I'm just using as a reference after distance between this window and this reference, which will place this window at the center of this wall. Now the next window that I'm going to add cannot be found a template. Which means that I'm going to use the type properties window in order to load a family from the library. And then I'm going to add the family type before placing this family on the project. After doing this, I'm just going to add other properties of this family. Now before finishing with the elevation, I'm also going to load an additional family type for the service of the project. I'm going to use once again the type of this window, not only in order to load the family type, but also in order to add the family type. Something that you're going to see with this family type is that this family type uses the properties instead of the type of this window. This is because of the way that this family was created. You will need to change the properties of this family a little bit differently. Or in other words, we don't actually need to create any family type. However, creating an in family type actually allows you to keep track of all the different families that you're creating. It's important for you to know the difference between the families that actually care about the type properties window and the ones that because the way that these families is actually different. And this is because everything a family type is a little bit more convenient than everything families in the pender as well. I'm going to add the brains of this elevation because up to this point I haven't used the elevations. So I'm going to make sure that the elements are placed based on this space at the elevations will need on the sheets. And after finishing with this elevation, I'm just going to open another elevation. Handed the door at the windows on the innovation. As a quick signer, ma, you can always use tomatic dimensions in order to move the elements of your project. But also that you can use the measure to recommend in order to get information that you might need before and after moving the elements. As a quick sign up, you're going to notice by this point that everything is pretty much the same. You only need to worry about the family type that you're using and the exact position that is going to have on the project. After placing these windows, I'm just going to open another elevation. After opening this elevation, I'm going to another elevation based on the sheets that are going to grater on. The first thing that I'm going to do on this elevation is actually select the elements that are also used on the opposite elevation before using the mirror axis. This is because of the symmetry of the project. Or in other words, you actually need to do everything twice. And after doing this, I'm just going to place the family types that are going to be used in this elevation. So with this in mind, I'm just going to finish placing these windows on the different elevations of the project before stating the project. As a quick sign, you can notice that you can use different references when placing and editing the position of the families or components. This is because private uses references in order to do this a little bit easier, which means that you can also use the romantic dimensions in order to do this a little bit easier as well. I'm going to another family to the project that I can use on this part of the project. Which means that I'm going to go once again to the type of this window in order to load a family. But also you are going to sing the ones that I selected, a family. I'm going to select only one family type. And this is because I'm going to use this family only once. Or in another words, I only need one family type. And after editing the properties of the family, I'm just going to place this family on the project. After placing the windows and also going to add a door just for the garage, I'm going to use once again the type Operas window in order to search for door that can be used on this part of the project. An actor selecting this family, I'm just going to add the family type based on the area in which it is going to be. So as you can notice, by this point, placing the families or components is actually very easy, especially if you already know where you're going to place them. Which also means that you can edit your project just as easy. 87. Placing the Curtain Walls (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this lesson, I'm going to continue with the project by adding the Cort was. In order to do this, I'm just going to go to the bill panel in order to use a wall to recommend. However, I'm going to change the family system to the family system that's used in order to create the cording walls. However, you're going to notice the cord wall and I use the same values, the words signed by Depo to the basic wall. After using this window in order to reset the constraints, I'm going to select this family type once again before placing the cording wall on this part of the project as well. I'm going to change the position of the cording wall by using the tools that you can find on the modified panel. As a big signer, you can always use and connected instead of a level because the cording walls are still considered walls, so you can use the level as a reference or not. And after placing this courting wall, I'm going to add the profit of the cordon wall based on the design of the project. Which means that I'm going to take into account the existing roofs of the project. And while drawing this profile, you're also going to notice that I'm taking into account the symmetry of the project. Which means that I'm going to be using once again, mirror pick axis in order to do this a little bit easier after placing the cording walls. I'm also going to place cording walls on this part of the project. I'm going to use once again the wall to argument and the same family type as well as the fit. You can use once again, tools circus that you can find on the modified panel in order to make this a little bit easier. But also in order to make sure that these elements are placed on elements that were already placed on the project. Which means that I'm going to make sure that the elements follow the same. The same, but it has been used on the project. And as a quick signer, remember that you can use the measure panel in order to verify the position of the elements already placed on the project. I have to place in the courting walls. I'm also going to add the properties, or more specifically, I'm going to add the constraints of the courting walls. So I'm going to add the base set. So upset after placing these courting walls and also going to place other courting walls on this area of the project. However, these courting walls are going to be smaller compared to the other courting walls of the project. This is because the use that they are going to have later on and when placing the courting walls, you're going to notice that I'm going to use once again mirror pick axis in order to avoid repeating the same process once again with all of that is being said, you can see that these courting walls are pretty easy to place and also added. However, you can add a little details to the courting walls depending on the design of your project. 88. Placing the Stairs (Exercise Using Revit 2024): On this property exercise. I'm just going to add the airs of the project. I'm going to go to the circulation panel in order to select the recommend. After selecting this to recommend, I'm also going to change the family type by using the text selector as well. I'm also going to change the properties of their. While doing this, you're going to notice a couple of things. One of them is that the levels are going to change the desired number of risers. Second, that the desired number of risers is actually going to change the actual riser height, which means that all these values are related to each other. Before drawing the run, I'm also going to addit the threat. Now while drawing the run, you are also going to see that on this view, you are not able to see all the elements of this there. Because of this, I'm going to change the visual star of the view. And then I'm just going to finish this stair by editing the width of the run before adding the landing as well. You're going to see that I placed on the family tie, placed on the supports of the stair. This is because I'm taking into account the changes that I'm going to do later on or in other words, I'm taking into account the details of the project. I'm going to select on the green check after finishing this stair. As a quick sign, remember that you can use the measure to recommend in order to verify the measurements of the elements that you're placing on the project. After creating this stair, I'm also going to add the rest of the project. So I'm going to open the tree bu in order to select the ceiling. Now edit on the ceiling. You're going to notice that I'm using as a reference, elements are already created on the project in order to make this a little bit easier, which also means that I'm going to take into account the elements that are just created before finishing for this part of the project. I'm also going to add the railings for this area of the project. I'm going to go once again to the circulation panel to select says sketch path. I'm going to select says pick lines before changing the upset and the options for this, I'm just going to select the elements of reference for the path. After I've done this, I'm going to select on the green check before placing the other railings of this project. However, I'm going to use once again pick as in order to do this, even though it's pretty much the same because you can actually pick lines once again with this, you're going to notice then all the elements are going to be placed the same way that there is one last railing that I'm going to create, and this one is also going to be on this floor. Or in another words, this railing is going to be created forward. The stairs are going to connect on this floor. Now, as you might have noticed, by this point, the stairs and the railings are very easy to create. However, there is a lot of details. They are still missing. And this is because I'm going to create most of the details at the same time. 89. Creating a Toposolid: The next few lessons are going to be focused on how you use rabbit in order to grade the surfaces of your projects, and these surfaces are created depending on the version that you are using. And this is because from this version of Ravit these surfaces are created by creating a top of solid. So if you have used a previous version of rabbit, this is going to seem familiar but at the same time different. And this is because if you go to the Massing and site tab, you are going to notice that there are two options on this strapdown. One of them, they will actually allow you to create a top of solid from sketch, and the other one that allows you to grade a top of solid from input. The one that is going to be different is the one that is called from sketch. So if I select this ocean, you are going to notice they are able to use the tro panel in order to grade the boundary of the surface. So the top of solids are now graded very much the same way. They grade a floor. So if I cancel these two argument, you're going to see that if I go to the architecture tab in order to select the two that is called floor, you are going to notice they are going to have very much the same panel. Joseph means that you can use the panel almost the same way. So you can draw the boundary as you normally would, while at the same time, you can use the tool circommans on the modified panel in order to edit the boundary before finishing the boundary. As a quick signer, I'm going to use the reference planes in order to do this a little bit easier. I'm also going to be using the reference planes in order to place this boundary relative to the origin. And once I've finished with this boundary, and just go in to select on the green check in order to show you that the similarities between the top of solid and the floor don't actually end there. So you will find that if you select the top of solid, web will allow you to use almost the same panels that you can use in order to d the floor. And among those panels, you're going to find the panel that allows you to eden the boundary, or in other words, the mold panel, as you do with the floors when you want to den, the boundary of the top of solid. So as you can notice, by this point, there are a lot of similarities between the top of solids and the floors. However, those similarities that actually extend to these slopes, and this is because the top of solids are actually based on slopes. So the only way for you to define a slope on an element such as this one is by actually using this slope arrow. However, you cannot use this lop arrow by using a tail. So instead of using hi at tail, you will need to select the option that is called slope on this drop down. And once you do this, you are going to see that gravit is going to allow you to change the slope of this lop arrow, which in return is going to allow you to define this or this element. And the result of using this slope is that gravit is going to create lines that are going to represent the different kinds on the domain. As well, it will have standard properties that you can change, such as, for example, the family type. So you are going to be able to use the type selector in order to select among the different family types that the template currently has, which also means that these elements are part of its own family system. And this family system is called topo solid. So even though there are similarities between the topo solids and the floors, both family systems are actually independent one from the other. And since there is a family system and a family type, then you are also going to be able to use the type of risk window in order to create a new family type by using the option that is called duplicate, which also implies you are going to be able to win the new family type. And once you created a new family type, you are going to be able to sing the family type on the type selector. And as well, the default family types have materials already assigned. So you will be able to change how you display the view in order to sing a different representation of your terrain or more specifically of the type of solid. This will actually affect all the views of your project where there are treaty views or duty views. So you're going to be able to see how these elements are going to be represented on treaty views, as well as the views that you normally using your project, such as the elevations or the sections. And even though I haven't covered the materials, you are going to be able to use the rains in order to get an idea of the different changes that you can do editing a material. And as well, since this element is very similar to the floors, you are going to be able to change the level that is used for the placement at the top of solid, but also the height upset. And as a greet signer, the properties that are grayed out will only allow you to see information regarding this element. So you are going to be able to find the dimensions at the level. And among the dimensions, you're going to find this low, the perimeter, the area, the volume, and so on. So these properties will be actually pretty useful in order to wedding the position of the top of solid on your project. In order to get information that you might need to use for quantification or construction, which means that an engineer as well as an architect can actually use this information. And since you're able to use the type bats window in order to create a new family type, you are also going to notice that you can actually edit this structure of the top solid. After selecting was set it, you will have the same dit assembly window that you have with the floors, and this means that you are going to be able to also use the previous in order to display the changes before applying the changes to the family type. And something important for you to know about the top of solid is that there is one layer that already has a check where variable. And this is what allows to actually represent the top of solid as an actual surface. And this is because it will allow the layer that has the checkbox to actually give a flat surface on the bottom. Regardless of this, which is actually very similar to what you can do with the walls. However, there are going to be a few family types. They don't actually use one of the layers as variable, and this is beg of the materials. So all of this being said, the top of solids are very easy to grade, mainly because they are very similar to the floors. However, there are a lot of differences between both of them because you are not able to create a floor from input. So there's a lot of functionality on the top of solids. They are not going to find on the floors. 90. Editing Points on the Toposolid: After creating a top of solid, you will have different options that you can use in order to add the shape of this element after selecting the element. So after selecting this type of solid, I'm going to be able to use the panel that focus on editing the shape or more specifically the shape, editing panel. And the first thing that I'm going to be using is the option or two that is called modify subelements. Now, this one actually allows you to add the elements that I created with the top of solid. More specifically, the elements that are used in order to add the shape. So these elements are not like the elements that make the form on the masses, meaning that these elements that actually compose the top of solid. And among these elements, you're going to find the points. Now, the points are nothing more than intersection between the lines of the boundary of the topo solid. Which means that these points are going to be placed on the vertices of the lines represent the boundary. And if you select any of these points, you're going to notice that there are controls and a value assigned to this point. But also, that the modified subelement panel actually has properties that you can change. And among these properties, you're going to find the elevation base, and on the dropdown of this property, you are going to find current level project based point, survey point, and internal origin. The first two are the only ones that are going to cover because I haven't covered the survenPoint and the internal origin. Well the project base point by default, is the B, the intersection between the two reference planes. So if I leave project based point, you are going to see that I can change the elevation of the point by inputting the value on this property, but also by inputting the value on the blue numbers. So you can do this in more than one way. And after changing these values, the terrain is going to update based on the changes. So little by little, I'm able to add the top of solid. Another good thing over the modified elements span is that it actually allows you to add a lot of precision to the changes, Bersa, but it also recognize the values if you select multiple elements at the same time, which means you're able to select multiple points, us the lines that represent the boundary of the top of solid. And as a quick signer, if you change the values of the line, this is also going to change the height of the points. And this is because the line is graded by the two points, which is something that is going to determine the height of the other lines. As well, something important for you to notice is that this value is actually based on the midpoint or center of the line, which means that the on this point is going to be the height of the midpoint or center of the line, which is something that you also have to take into account when deciding the values of the points. And regardless of the changes on these values, the top of solid is going to have a flat pattern surface as long as you keep using the pattern layer as verifs, which is pretty much the same thing that you can do with a prime. And also, the base project is not different than the current level unless you actually change the base of the project. So by default, the current level and the base of the project is going to be the same. However, you are going to notice that if you change from project base point to current level, then the height upset will actually change the value of the elevation. Because now the value of the elevation is going to be the sum of the high offset and the original elevation. And this might be confusing at first because the current level and the project based point are going to display the same exact values unless you actually change your current level, which means that if you use current level instead of project based point, you will see a change if you change the level in which the top of solid is actually placed. So after changing the level, I'm going to be able to show you then now there is going to be a difference between using current level and the pro point. So the default height of the current base point is zero, while the height of the level depends on the height that you selected. And while changing these values, you are going to see that the values on the points are going to change as well as the position on the top of solid, but also the values on the dimensions that you can find on the properties are also going to change depending on the elevation base and the level that you're using. So the information related to the spa solid is going to change depending on these properties. As well, you're able to add your own points to the top of solid basing the two that is home at point. And once I use this two, you will be able to see. They will have the ways in order to place this point. One is along the surface and the other one is absolute. But also, you will be able to determine the elevation base as well as the plic elevation. The absolute actually allows you to place the point based on the values of your choosing. While a long surface will actually use the surface as a reference in order to place the point. Meaning that one of them will actually use the elevation base in order to determine the elevation of your points, but the other one will use the surface as it was elevation base. And in order to show you this a little bit better, I'm going to place a few points on the top of solid. And after placing these points, you are going to notice that the values are the same. While at the same time, you will be able to see additional lines that were created on the top of solid. Now these lines are in order to connect the points they are using a different height. So these ones are pretty much lines that make the mesh. And after using absolute, I'm just going to change along the surface in order for you to notice that now the points are going to be using the height of the surface as a reference in order to blaze the points based on the value that was assigned to the elevation. So this is going to add the value of the elevation on the elevation of the surface. And regardless of the way in which you add the points, you are going to notice, you can simply change the elevation of these points by just simply using once again, the modified sub elements pano. So with this in mind, you can quickly edit the top of solid by using a specific values. And as a weak sino you are going to notice that grab doesn't actually delete the points, even if they're not editing the top of sold. So you can choose to keep the top of size later on in order to add the top of solen later on. And while editing and the elevation of these points, you are going to see that the mesh is going to change accordingly, meaning that the lines that connect these points are also going to change, are going to be created based on how these points can be used in order to create a mesh or in another words, the double solid. Now, the mesh is another way to go the shape. However, if you have never used a software that refers to shapes as meshes, then the meshes are nothing more. Then the element that is graded by the lines and the points that are equated, where those lines connect, in other words, the mesh is the same thing that you can see when creating a mess. So b raised the representation of a surface on top of the mesh. So all of this has been said, you can see that the points is actually very easy if you actually know the design that you want to use, but also it allows you to make a few changes depending on the side, or in other words, depending on how the project is going to change the rain, which means that all of this is actually very important because you will be able to grade your side by using your own design, but also by using references that you might already have in your project or that you get input to your project. And this is because gravity is going to recognize existing references. So you are going to be able to use elements that already placed on your project of reference or files that you input in, in order to use them, what grading your project. So throughout these lessons, I'm actually going to show you how you can do this. But also, what is the project based point, the survey point, and so on. 91. Adding Split Lines: The terrains will also allow you to use lines in order to edit the surface. So if you select at top of solid, you're going to in. The mid lower it says at point, there is a two that is called at split line, and the split line will simply allow you to create a line that will edit the surface. And the way this line actually does it is by using or creating the points. So the points that are normally used in order to create a line can be also used in order to edit the surface. Additionally, you're not able to place lines outside of the boundary of the top of solid, which means that if I try to place a line outside of the top of solid, this line will be created within the boundary automatically. So if you use these two argument without using existing points, you are going to end up with three different elements that you can use in order to di the top of solid, including the split line. So you can select any of these elements independently in order to change the elevation by using the blue numbers or by using the modified subelements panel. As important for you that the default values are going to be based on how the split line was created. So for example, in this case, the point that was created first is going to use the height of this point on the top surface, while the point at the end is going to do the same on the opposite hive, while the line is going to take its value on the midpoint or center of the line. Additionally, you are going to see the split line or recognize the boundary terrain as a reference, which means that you can also use the lines that are graded once you edit the top of solid, or in another words, you're going to use the lines that gravit grades in order to grade the mesh or the top of solid in order to create the top of solid or the mesh, as you can do with the boundary. So the lines and points that make the surface at the top of solid can be used as a reference. And this also means that if you use these lines within the boundary at the surface, then this are going to be using the height that the top of solid actually has on those points, which also means that these points are not going to have an exact value on the surface unless they define those values after grading the lines. So you are going to be able to define the elevation of the lines as well as the points that are graded by the split line after grading the lines. So you are going to be able to use these lines in order to read the rain based on your project. I and since you're able to use existing references in order to move the points, then you are going to be able to actually create the base of your project on the terrain at any point. You choose a means to use these lines in order to define how the terrain is going to function based on your design or vice versa. If you use your project as a reference, when editing a terrain. We chose a means, they can create references at any point in order to use them when editing on the top of solid. And in this case, you are going to notice they can use the model line as a reference. We chose a means that you can use the detail lines. So you are going to sin that you can simply use, but you already know about the floors. And as a quick sinner, remember that the files that are imported from a software such as arroga uses model lines on bin or in another words, the lines that are created in software such as Surroge are converted into model lines once the file has been imported. As aqui singer when selecting the references or the top of solid, remember that you can use the filter in order to avoid selecting unnecessary elements. Now with this in mind, there are a few options that you can seeing one edit the rain. So just, for example, an option that is called preview points, which will allow you to display the points that you can use in order to edit the surface without selecting where it says, modify elements or the top of Sol as well, you can always change the elevation base of these points in order to help you the top of sold based on your project. However, you are going to notice that in order to select these points, you actually need to hover the points, which means you are not able to select these points as you normally would. So you won't have access to selecting multiple points at the same time, even though you can use tap on the keyboard in order to help you with your selection. And as a quick sign, you can also use the option that is called Big supports on the surfaces. However, you might never get to use this because this is actually intended for structural supports. So unless you place atop a solid on top of an existing structure, you most likely will never get to use this option. An example of this would be a green roof or a garden within a building. And if you want to reset the changes on the surface, you can simply use reset shape on this panel. So all of this being said, you can notice that editing these elements is actually pretty easy, even though it might be a little bit confusing because many of these tools or options carry over from the floors. 92. Using Sub Divide: On this lesson, I'm going to show you how you can add more detail to the top of solid by actually adding additional elements to it. And the way that you do this is by actually using a two that is called subdivide. And in order to use this tool, you actually need to select a top of solid. So once I select the top of solid, I'm going to be able to use the subdivide two in order to add an element that is going to be placed on top of the existing surface. And this is because this element is actually placed based on the placement of the top of solid or more specifically, based on the top layer. And the way they actually define the element is by using the chop panel. So I'm going to be able to use the same tools or ends that I have been using with elements, such as the floors in order to create the boundary of this element. And once that I have done this, I'm just going to position the element, based on the design that I'm going to use. And then I'm just going to select on the green check in order to show you how this element actually looks like. So after this, I'm just going to open the GDB in order for you to see the element, but also how to use the properties in order to the element. So the changes that you can actually do basing the properties are the material that's subdivide he and hurricane turns. The material is something that I haven't covered. However, the subdivide height is the height of the element on top of the surface. And I'm going to illustrate this by grading the additional elements that would be used instead of the top layer of the rest of the top of sold, or in other words, the element that is going to function as the top layer of the remaining surface, which means that I'm going to select once again, the top of sold. So I can use once again, the subdivide two in order to grade the following elements on this element. And in order to illustrate this a little bit better, I'm going to add it a little bit the element that I created in order to show you a couple of things. One of them is that you can have an element with multiple boundaries, but also that you can create multiple elements on top of the surface of the top of solid. While at the same time, every new element that you create on top of the surface can also use as a reference, existing elements, which means that you can use constraints and also biometry with these elements as you normally would. You're also going to notice that regardless of the boundary that you create, these elements are always going to be placed on top of the surface. So you're not actually able to change their placement on the surface. Additionally, the properties of these elements are going to be independent from each other, which means that you can change the height of each of the elements as well as the materials. And also something for you to notice is that on the properties, you will find the dimensions of these elements. So you will be able to find the volume, the elevation at top, and the elevation at And after finishing this element, I'm just going to edit the extent elements before creating new ones. And this is because these elements are going to be used in order to represent a strip. So I'm going to create the basic elements that I use in order to represent the strip on a project, which means that after editing this element, I'm just going to create a new one for a different part of this. And as a quick sign, you're also going to see that these elements actually use family types, which means that these elements function very much the same way as the shapes that you can create on the families. And once I have done this, I'm just going to edit this element based on what it's meant to represent. Now while doing this. You're also going to see that you can edit the properties, what grading the element, Water grading the element? What the property that is co inhered contour, will you simply allow the additional element to inherit the contour of the top of solid, this means that when you add the top of solid, you are also going to edit the elements that are created based on the surface of the topo solid or in other words, the elements that are created by using the two, that is c of dive. Or in other words, how these elements are going to inherit the changes that I do on the surface of the top of solid. So these elements are really useful because before this special grabbing, you actually have to do this by using families, the word model in place, or even floors. So you have to use other tools in order to get the same result. So what these tools actually does is that they actually create an element that always uses as a reference on the surface of the top of solid in the same way that an extrusion would actually use a phase of a reference while creating your family. And now, I'm just going to add the element that is meant to represent the strip. So I'm going to select the top of solid once again and then I'm going to use the subdivide two in order to use the tools that you can find on the dra panel. And while creating this element, you're going to see that the elements can only be created within the boundary of the top of solid. So the boundaries of these elements cannot be outside of the host and the reason why creating the actual strep is in order to show you that you cannot actually use negative values on the subdivide height, which means that this element cannot be used to subtract on the top of sold. So because of this, you will need to use a different method in order to do this. So one method that you can actually use is actually create the top layer of the top of solen as an additional element, which means that instead of using the top layer of the top of solid, you actually use the layer below that as the top of the top sold. So the top layer of the top of solid can be created an additional element. So this is an actual work around to this limitation. And before creating the soup element that is going to represent the street of the side. I'm just going to select the topo solid in order to edit the topo solid by on the tools and the shape, edit in panel. And the reason why I'm going to do this is to show you how the property that is in here contour actually affects the type of elements on the top of solid. So I'm going to make a few changes on the top of solid, knowing that the topazlid is going to pass these changes to the elements that are created based on the top of solid, or in other words, how these elements are going to inherit the changes of the topo solid. However, this workaround only functions if you remove the top layer of the top of solid because as you might have noticed, the top of solid also is used to represent the side on sections and elevations, which means that you will need to take into account how you're going to represent the terrain of the project while doing this. As a quick designer, remember that if you want to subtract from the top a solid, you can actually use a mes, which means that you can use the mess in order to subtract from the top of solid before and after creating these elements. However, the mass will still need to take into account the changes on the surface or in another words, the contors now in this case, I'm just going to show you the result of using this work around without actually editing the layers on the top of solid. And this is because editing the layers works the same way on the top of solid as editing the layers on the floors. But also, because in this case, I'm not actually adding the materials to these elements, which means that I'm not going to use this topo solid on a project. So I'm just going to use the topo solid in order to show you how you can add these elements, but also how these elements are represented on other views of the project that you normally would be using to represent your project. So all of this being said, the tap of solids are easier to use than the terrains that you created on previous versions of gravitEspecially because now you can use the subdivide in order to add additional elements without having to use tools mess that are not related to the sip or in other words, workarounds, such the families model in place, the floors, or even a mess. So using the elements is actually more convenient. Actually, once you take into account the way that represents the top of solid and the elements that I'm creating, which means that these elements are represented in a way that they can be used on the sheets of your project. 93. Creating the Site Using Existing Files: On this lesson, what I want to show you is how can you use files that you already created in order to create your site. And this is because the tap of surface actually allows you to use references that you have on the project or that you load to the project as a reference. And in order to do this, I'm going to go to the Insert tab in order to input a file that you already created. Once I open this window, I'm just going in to select the file, as well as the options that I'm going to be using in order to place this file on the project. That's a go signer, you can specify the layers that you want to input. But also, you can change the position of the file, based on the options on this window. And once they're finished with the options that you can use in order to load the file, you are going to see that now the file has been placed on the level that is set by default. Since the file that has been inputted is actually pinned, I will need to remove the pin in order to move the file, which means they're going to be able to use the tools on the modify panel as well as the Rs and the keyword. So in this case, I just going to change the position of this file before creating the tapa solid. And one advice that I can give you is to actually create the top of solid based on the size of the reference, or in another words, a little bit bigger than the file that has been inpoted, which in this case is actually very useful because the side actually includes the surroundings of the construction. A And a few things for you to know about using references with the top of solids. Is that the type of solids will recognize files and references you already have on the project or that you actually import it. However, the files that you importing from supper such as Soga are actually perceived as a single element, which means that if you create at top of solid, you won't be able to use poem in order to edit the top of solid based on the file. So before editing the top of solid, I'm also going to be using the oceans that you have with this file, so I can use it as a reference, which means that I'm going to select the file that I just inputted and then I'm going to explore the file as much as I can. And once I have done this, you are going to notice that now the file has been exploded into lines where you can actually select, edit, and also use as a reference. However, I'm also going to group all these lines because all these lines can get in the way. If you are going to create a project on top of the top of solid, which is something that you can avoid by using groups. So with this in mind, I'm just going to select all the lines on this project in order to create a group. So in order to do this, I'm just simply going to a void, edit on the top of solid, and then I'm going to use the selection box on a view in which I actually able to see all the lines at the same time. And then I'm going to use the filter in order to make sure that I'm only selecting the elements that we creating after exploding the file. And also I'm creating the groups in order to show you how you can handle the files that you import to a project in case that you want to use as a reference. So this is something that I would do with files that I use when creating the site of the project. And after this, I'm just going to select the name of the group. So after doing this and just going to start adding the pins that are going to add the top of solid. While doing this, you are going to notice that you can use absolute or along the surface. And since on this case, the entire surface is actually using the same height and just simply going to use along the surface. However, this might be confusing at first because you still have to take into account if the next spot of the surface actually has the height that you're looking for. So because of this, you might just simply want to use absolute. And as a quick singer, if you have any issues with the reference, remember that you can change the visual down in order to visualize the reference a little bit better. And since the points are now use the drawing that are inputed as a reference, you're also going to be able to see that you can actually select the points that will make the top surface easier to grade, which also implies that you can simply change the height of the point by using the point panel to the bewe or even on tree de bus, which means that you can also change the view they are currently using, not only in order to see the result, but also in order to edit or place the points. As well, remember that you can change the height of the points after grading the points. So you don't actually have to keep the values of the points that you assign at the moment that you're grading the surface. Now with this in mind, I'm not actually going to finish the entire surface because the process is going to be pretty much the same, which means that there is not going to be a difference between what I'm doing right now and what would you need to do in order to finish this. However, while working in your projects, you might find files that you already have or that they have been given to you. And one of these file the file that you need to use in order to grade the side of your project. So because of this, Rabbit also has the option in order for you to grade at top of solid, by using an existing file. So if you already have a file with the values that you are going to be using, you can simply import the file in order to create a top of solid based on this file. So in order to show you how to do this, I'm just going to go to the Insert tab, and then I'm going to input another file to the project how this time, it's going to be a file that already has the information that I'm going to be using in order to create the top of solid, which means that this file. A treaty file. So once I selected the file, I'm just going to select an open, and then I just going to leave all the layers of the file because I make sure that this file didn't have unnecessary layers before importing the file. And after importing the file, you're also going to notice that the file has been placed based on the level that was selected by default, but also, but in order to move the file. Need to Up in the file. So in case that you have any issues with the placement, you can simply use the tools on the modified panel in order to change the placement or you can use the properties if you know the values that you want to use. And in order to use this file, in order to create a top of solid, I just need to go to the Masan site in order to select the option that is called grade from input on the strap down. And once I have done this, you are going to see two additional options. One of them is grade from CAD and the other one is grade from CSB. In this case, I'm just going to select grad from cab be guess at the file that I inputted. And once that I have done this, you are going to notice that you are able to select the layers that you want to use in order to create the topol and once I've done this, you're going to notice that the top of solid is actually grading in the same way as a normal topo solid around this case, the grading the surface at the top of solid based on the foul, which also means that the top of solid is going to function like any other. So you can change the family type that is assigned to the top of solid. Which also means that you can add existing family types, but also that you can create new ones. And more importantly, you can keep editing the top of sold by editing the boundary or the elements. So you can say the grading at top of sold based on existing references, it's actually pretty easy, even though it might seem a little bit tedious when you don't have a tre file or in another warrant, when you cannot simply create a top of sold by using a treaty file, where there is a cat file or a file that has the information that you need in order to create the top of sold. 94. The Graded Region: The top of solids, they create and b are just to the design or to the surface that they are going to represent. However, they are not able to do both at the same time. And because of this, there is a tool that you can use in order to create a copy of the top of solid that is meant to be used to either have a copy of the original top surface or in another words, the original site, or it allows you to create a variation that you can use in order to work on your design. And this tool is graded region. And in order to use the graded reg going to create a top of solid that I can use in order to show you the different options that you have while up in the top of solid. So I have to create on the top of solid, I'm just going to go to the Massin and sit tab, and then I just going to use the tool that is called a region. And once that I use the graded region, I'm going to be able to open a window, which will allow me to choose the way that I want to copy the top of solid. Not the first option allows you to create an identical copy, which means that it's going to copy the points, as well as the boundary. And this one is very useful because you can keep editing the top of solid as you normally would without worrying about the top of solid or side that you have from the beginning. Right away. You are also going to be able to notice that you can have both type of solids at the same time. However, the presentation of the tap of solid that was created by its en graded region is going to be a little bit different in order to avoid confusion. Wine quick sign, Ramer you can cover the elements on the project in order to have a textbox with basic information of that element, as well, you can use tap on the keyword in order to make your selection a little bit easier. And before showing you, I'm going to move the toposlPo I'm going to make sure they're able to differentiate between one topo sole and the other by grading a family type for this toposlid because otherwise, both topo solids are going to be using the same family type. So not only going to grade a new family type, but I'm also going to make sure that the name represents the use of this topo solid is going to happen the project. Now as well, you are going to notice the sense this is an actual topo solid. You are going to be able to use the properties in order to change the level in which this topo solid has been placed, which is pretty much the same thing that you can do with the original topo solid. And this also implies that you can keep using the options that you have on the shape editing panel and the topo solid shaping panel. Now I'm just going to use the second option that you have after using graded region. So after selecting where it says graded region, you are going to see that the second option only allows you to grade a top of solid based on the boundaries of the solid, which means that it's not going to copy any of the points on the interior of the top of solid, which is actually pretty useful if you're creating a top of solid that you are going to be using just for the design of the project, or in other words, when you are going to edit the site without actually taking too much into account the original surface. In other words, when you're editing the tap of solid, just based on the design. Now as a click signer, this representation is actually based on the graphing settings. So once I show you the graphic settings, you're going to be able to see how you can change the brains and many of the elements on your project. So all of this being said, you're going to see. The both options are actually different. However, both of them are still going to grade at top of solid. They can be used for different purposes while working in your project. 95. The Site Components: RBD allows you to change the representation of the topo solid, and this means you are going to be able to actually change the way that you represent the surface at the top of solid, based on your country region or based on the project that you're working on. And this is even more important if you're an engineer, and this is because as an engineer, you want to make sure that you're able to represent information accurately, but also based on your profession. With this in mind, I'm going to create a top of solid based on an existing file so that I don't have to create a top of solid for sketching. So after importing this file, I'm just going to position the file before grading a top of solid based on this file. So once that I select this option, I'm just going to select create from K before creating the top of solid, based on the file. And once the file has been grading, I'm just going to delete the file that I imported before editing the representation of the top of solid. And this representation will actually depend the beat you are using. So if the bed you are using actually cuts through the top of solid, you're going to get a different representation than the one that you have on the side. So in order to show you all the lines that are created on the surface, I'm just going to open the side bed and once that I have done this, I'm going to select the top of solen before opening the types window. And on the type everybody's window, you are going to find a standard properties also a property that is called front door display. And this one actually allows you to change how the contours are displayed on the top of solid. So I'm going to sell a grasa set in order for you to see how you can change the contour display. And once I've done this, you are going to see the values that I use in order to define the representation of this element. And on this top of solid, you will actually have two sets of lines or in another words, two rows. So each of the rows can be actually use in order to change how the contour lines are created, and the default values are going to match the values that you are using on the points. Now these values see sing at first. So because of this, I'm going to disable one of them, which means that I'm going to check next to the values that determine this lines. And once I have done this, you are going to see that only some of the lines are going to remain. And I'm going to change how the remaining lines are going to be displayed in order for you to see how these values relay one with the other. Now this may actually be confusing at first between the interval, this star, and this stop. So the interbo is nothing more than the spacing between the lines. While the star is the one that determines from where these lines are going to begin, taking into account the placement of the top of solid. While this stop is going to be where these lines are no longer going to be graded based also on the placement of the top of solid, which means that the placement of the top of solid actually has a difault value of zero. So in this case, the star is negative in order to make sure the lines are graded below the placement of the top of solid. While the positive value on this stop is in order to make sure that there are lines graded above the place. The top of sold. So changing these values is actually going to affect how the contour is actually display, which is sending the UN notes if you select on a plane, and then once again on a plane on the types window after changing these values. And with this in mind, you're also going to notice that you can change from multiple values to single value, which means that you can have a single line or multiple lines at the same time. Now with this in mind, there is also going to be the option of subcategory. Now the subcategory only allows you to change how the line is going to be displayed. Now this will actually change based on the graphic settings. So by Tipo, you might not actually see a change even if you change the detail level. And among this, you can find the hidden lines, the common edges, the folding lines, the primary contour, secondary contours, and split lines. So this option will change a little bit, the appearance of the top surface if the line types can be viewed accordingly to their properties. Or in other words, if the properties of the view on display them the way they are intended. And since up to this point, I haven't covered the graphic settings. I'm just going to avoid using additional subcategories than the ones that were already assigned. However, I'm going to show you all these values and also apply to the other lines that you can display on the surface of the top of solid. So what is being said, you're going to notice that even though this might seem a little bit confusing at first, it's actually quite simple because the only thing they are actually changing is how many lines do you actually want to see based on the values you want to use on your side, which is something that is going to be very important because this is going to affect how you present your project to others, but also the construction of your project. And as I mentioned before, these lines are actually based on the placement of the top of solid. You're also going to notice the changing the placement of the top of sold is also going to change the contour display. So if I change the height upset or even the level, these lines are going to appear at a different position. So you will have to keep in mind not only the values you are using but also the placement of the topo solid. At the same time, if there are specific lines that you might need to have in your project, you can also use the options on this window in order to insert or even delete the lines. So with this in mind, I can even create a single line that is meant to represent the placement of the top solid, which means that I'm going to be able to grade a line that is going to be a the same height of the placement, while at the same time, remember that you can change the sub category in order to change how this line is going to be displayed. Something that you might have noticed is that this is very similar to the floors and the walls. So you can get different results. Depends layers or in other words, these are layers that can be used to change the appearance of the surface independently from each other. So all of this has been said, the display of the lines on the surface of the top solid is actually important because of the information that it provides to the other members of the project or those who are going to be in charge of the construction. However, there is a few things that still need to core in order for you to see how you can add a lot more precision and quality to the presentation of the top solid as well as your projects. 96. The Parking Components: The top of solid can be used as a hose for different components because it's very similar to the floors. And one of the categories that you can use on the top of solen is the parking component. Now the parking components are the ones that are actually used in order to define certain areas of your project, such as, for example, the parking lot, so you can actually create the parking lot of your project by using the stop of family. Now the parking component can be found on the massing and sit tab. So after creating the stop of solid and just going to go to the massing and site tab in order to show you where you can find the tool that allows you to place the parking component, but also what a parking component actually is, after selecting these two, I'm going to be able to place a component under this category, by using the top of solin as a host. So if I select this component, the properties is going to display the top of solin as a host. And since the top of solid is the host, but you can edit the host as you normally would, and the parking component is going to adjust to the top of solid, which is something that is also going to apply to the elements that you can create, by using the subdivide. So if you add additional elements to the top of solid, you are going to notings you can use this to once again in order to place these components on the top of solid. However, this component is going to recognize the sub elements that are grading, but it's on the subdivide, which means that even though you are placing this component on the top of solen, this component is still able to use the sub element as a host because the sub element is not part of the top of sold. So I can edit this additional element as I normally would, and the component is still going to adjust to that element. Now with this in mind, you're going to see that if you add the top surface, the parking component is going to change the host that is using. And this means that this component is going to be using the topo solid as a host. However, you can always change the host that you're using by just simply using p new host. So you don't actually have to use the host that is assigned by default, and this actually functions to all copies of the same component. So you can actually create the parking area of your project and then just simply adjust those families for the topo solid. This means then changing the host, sometimes sexually necessary with families, such as this one, because they actually use the topo solid as a host. So many of these families don't actually use Bdfone sub elements that can be created on the surface of the topo solid. As well, since these are components, you're going to see once again that you can keep using the type selector in order to change the family type that you want to use in your project. But also, you can actually open the Type Arbais window in order to see the family system that is being used as well as the family type. And this also means that you can use the standard options on the Type Prpas window in order to create a new family type or in order to rename a family type. So with this, you are going to be able to create your own family type. Normally would. And then just simply edit those family types without editing the existing ones. And since this is actually standard among the families, you are not going to see that much of a difference between what you can do with these families and the other families that have used before, regardless of the discipline or use. Additionally, since the parking components actually need a host, then bin is going to automatically assign a host if the top of solid is deleted, which is the same thing that happens if you also delete as an element that you might be using as a host. So all of this being said, you can easily place the components that you would normally be using for the parking your project on the parking area of your project.